as 1100.101-1992 technical drawing - general principles · 2020. 10. 27. · as 1100.101—1992...

240
AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard R Technical drawing Part 101: General principles Accessed by RMIT UNIVERSITY LIBRARY on 29 Jul 2013 (Document currency not guaranteed when printed)

Upload: others

Post on 18-Mar-2021

4 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992

Australian Standard�

Technical drawing Part 101: General principles

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 2: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

This Australian Standard was prepared by Committee ME/72, Technical Drawing. It wasapproved on behalf of the Council of Standards Australia on 25 August 1992 and publishedon 16 November 1992.

The following interests are represented on Committee ME/72:

Association of Consulting Engineers, Australia

Australian Chamber of Commerce

Bureau of Steel Manufacturers of Australia

Confederation of Australian Industry

Department of Administrative Services

Department of Defence

Department of Employment and Technical and Further Education, South Australia

Institute of Draftsmen, Australia

Institute of Industrial Arts

Institution of Engineers, Australia

Master Builders — Construction and Housing Association, Australia

N.S.W Technical and Further Education Commission

Public Works Department, N.S.W.

University of New South Wales

University of Queensland

Additional interests participating in preparation of Standard:

Australian Institute of Steel Construction

University of Technology, Sydney

Review of Australian Standards. To keep abreast of progress in industry, Australian Standards are subject toperiodic review and are kept up to date by the issue of amendments or new editions as necessary. It is importanttherefore that Standards users ensure that they are in possession of the latest edition, and any amendments thereto.

Full details of all Australian Standards and related publications will be found in the Standards Australia Catalogueof Publications; this information is supplemented each month by the magazine ‘The Australian Standard’, whichsubscribing members receive, and which gives details of new publications, new editions and amendments, and ofwithdrawn Standards.

Suggestions for improvements to Australian Standards, addressed to the head office of Standards Australia, arewelcomed. Notification of any inaccuracy or ambiguity found in an Australian Standard should be made withoutdelay in order that the matter may be investigated and appropriate action taken.

This Standard was issued in draft form for comment as DR 90110.

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 3: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992

Australian Standard�

Technical drawing

Part 101: General principles

For history before 1992, see Preface.Second edition AS 1100.101—1992.

PUBLISHED BY STANDARDS AUSTRALIA(STANDARDS ASSOCIATION OF AUSTRALIA)1 THE CRESCENT, HOMEBUSH, NSW 2140

ISBN 0 7262 7806 8

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 4: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

PREFACE

This Standard was prepared by the Standards Australia Committee on Technical Drawing tosupersede AS 1101.101–1984. AS 1100.101–1984 was a revision and amalgamation of AS 1100Part 1–1977; Part 2–1975; Part 3–1971; Part 4–1972; Part 5–1973; Part 6 first published 1973and revised in 1980; Part 7 first published 1972 and revised in 1978; and Part 8–1975.

AS 1100 Parts 1 to 8 ran concurrently with AS CZ1.1 of 1976 which was withdrawn in 1982.AS CZ1.1 was a revision of AS CZ1 which was first published in 1941, with further editionspublished in 1944, 1946, 1951, 1966 and 1973. The 1966 edition also superseded AS Z8 of 1956(endorsement of BS 308.2–1953 without amendment).

The AS CZ1 Standards were endorsements of The Institution of Engineers, Australia publicationsentitled, Engineering Drawing Practice. The document from which these publications originated,was published by the Institution under the title, Recommended Engineering Drawing Practice, butthis was not endorsed by this Association.

This Standard is one of a series dealing with technical drawing, the other Standards in the seriesbeing as follows:

Part 201: Mechanical drawingPart 301: Architectural drawingPart 401: Engineering survey and engineering survey design drawingPart 501: Structural engineering drawing

In the preparation of this Standard, the committee took account of changes in Australian technicaldrawing practice and recommendations of the International Organization for Standardization.Also considered were the equivalent British, American, and Canadian Standards.

In its preparation many minor changes in the layout of the text and figures have taken placeresulting in greater consistency and improved ease of use of the document.

The committee considers it important that this document will be applicable to all sectors of thetechnical field. For instance, although many of the examples are of a mechanical nature, theprinciples are applicable to all fields of technical drawing. Accordingly, wherever necessary,examples have been expanded to show other applications of the principles.

Clarity of expression in defining the designer’s requirements and in the interpretation of theserequirements has been considered at all times. The introduction of symbols now plays animportant part in drawing practice so that language barriers in reading drawings are reduced to aminimum and the valuable drafting time spent inserting notes is minimized.

The section on dimensioning, which was formerly in AS 1101.201, has been rearranged to make iteasier to read and updated to Australian and International practice.

The use of computer–aided drafting (CAD) to produce technical drawings is acknowledged. In linewith the practice of international Standards committees dealing with areas related to technicaldrawings, the requirements and principles of this Standard shall apply to users of CAD systems.

This Standard is in agreement with the following International Standards:

ISO 128 Technical drawings — General principles of presentation

ISO 129 Technical drawings — Dimensioning — General principles, definitions, methods ofexecution and special indications

ISO 406 Technical drawing — Tolerancing of linear and angular dimensions

ISO 1101 Technical drawings — Geometrical tolerancing — Tolerancing of form orientation,location and run–out — Generalities, definitions, symbols, indications on drawings

ISO 1660 Technical drawings — Dimensioning and tolerancing of profiles

ISO 3040 Technical drawings — Dimensioning and tolerancing — Cones

ISO 3098/1 Technical drawings — Lettering, Part 1: Currently used characters

ISO 5455 Technical drawings — Scales

ISO 5459 Technical drawings — Geometrical tolerancing — Datums and datum–systems forgeometrical tolerances

ISO 6410 Technical drawings — Conventional representation of threaded parts

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 5: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

CONTENTS

Page

SECTION 1 SCOPE AND GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 APPLICATION 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 SURFACE TEXTURE 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2 MATERIALS, SIZES AND LAYOUT OF DRAWING SHEETS

2.1 SCOPE OF SECTION 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 TYPES OF DRAWINGS AND RELATED TERMINOLOGY 15. . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 MATERIALS 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 SIZE OF DRAWING SHEETS 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 LAYOUT OF DRAWINGS SHEETS 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3 LINES

3.1 TYPES OF LINES 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 DIMENSIONS OF LINES 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 LINE SPACING 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 LINE DENSITY 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 TYPICAL APPLICATION OF LINES 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 SPECIAL APPLICATIONS OF LINES 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 ORDER OF PRIORITY OF COINCIDENT LINES 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4 LETTERS, NUMERALS AND SYMBOLS

4.1 LETTERS AND NUMERALS 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 ITEM REFERENCES 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 SYMBOLS AND TERMINATORS 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5 SCALES

5.1 GENERAL 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 TERMINOLOGY 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 INDICATION OF SCALES 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 SCALE RATIOS 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 LARGE SCALE DRAWINGS 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 6 PROJECTIONS

6.1 IDENTIFICATION 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 TYPES OF PROJECTION 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 ORTHOGONAL PROJECTION 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 SPATIAL GEOMETRY 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 AXONOMETRIC PROJECTION 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 OBLIQUE PROJECTION 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7 PERSPECTIVE PROJECTION 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 OTHER DETAILS — PICTORIAL DRAWINGS 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7 SECTIONS

7.1 GENERAL 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 CUTTING PLANES 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 HATCHING 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 SECTIONS 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 6: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

Page

SECTION 8 DIMENSIONING

8.1 SCOPE 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 GENERAL DIMENSIONING 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 GENERAL TOLERANCES AND RELATED PRINCIPLES 119. . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING AND RELATED

PRINCIPLES—GEOMETRY 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 INTERPRETATION OF MAXIMUM MATERIAL CONDITION 155. . . . . . . . 8.6 DATUM SPECIFICATION AND INTERPRETATION 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 VIRTUAL CONDITION 161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8 SCREW THREADS — ORIENTATION AND LOCATION 161. . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9 GEARS AND SPLINES — ORIENTATION AND LOCATION 165. . . . . . . . 8.10 TOLERANCES OF POSITION 165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.11 TOLERANCES OF FORM, PROFILE, ORIENTATION, AND

RUNOUT 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 9 CONVENTIONAL REPRESENTATIONS

9.1 SCOPE OF SECTION 206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 METHOD OF PRESENTATION 206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 REPRESENTATION OF FEATURES AND PARTS 206. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDICES

A SOME COMPARISONS OF ISO STANDARDS WITH THIS STANDARDAND OTHER NATIONAL STANDARDS 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B EXAMPLES OF GEOMETRY TOLERANCE DISPLAY 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C AXONOMETRIC PROJECTION — ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 219. . . . . . D OBLIQUE PROJECTION — ANGLE OF LINE OF SIGHT 223. . . . . . . . . . . . . . E MAXIMUM MATERIAL PRINCIPLE 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F ORIENTATION OF ACTUAL LINES AND SURFACES 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G COMPARISON OF COORDINATE AND POSITION TOLERANCING 229. . . . H INTERPRETATION OF DATUMS 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INDEX 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Copyright — STANDARDS AUSTRALIA

Users of Standards are reminded that copyright subsists in all Standards Australia publications and software. Except where the Copyright Act allowsand except where provided for below no publications or software produced by Standards Australia may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system inany form or transmitted by any means without prior permission in writing from Standards Australia. Permission may be conditional on an appropriateroyalty payment. Requests for permission and information on commercial software royalties should be directed to the head office of StandardsAustralia.

Standards Australia will permit up to 10 percent of the technical content pages of a Standard to be copied for use exclusively in–house bypurchasers of the Standard without payment of a royalty or advice to Standards Australia.

Standards Australia will also permit the inclusion of its copyright material in computer software programs for no royalty payment providedsuch programs are used exclusively in–house by the creators of the programs.

Care should be taken to ensure that material used is from the current edition of the Standard and that it is updated whenever the Standard is amended orrevised. The number and date of the Standard should therefore be clearly identified.The use of material in print form or in computer software programs to be used commercially, with or without payment, or in commercial contracts issubject to the payment of a royalty. This policy may be varied by Standards Australia at any time.

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 7: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

5 AS 1100.101—1992

STANDARDS AUSTRALIA

Australian Standard

Technical drawing

Part 101: General principles

SECTION 1 SCOPE AND GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE This Standard sets out the basic principles of technical drawing practice.

Section 1 sets out abbreviations.

Section 2 specifies materials, sizes, and layout of drawing sheets.

Section 3 specifies the types and minimum thicknesses of lines to be used and shows typical examples of theirapplication.

Section 4 sets out the requirements for distinct uniform letters, numerals, and symbols.

Section 5 sets out recommended scales and their application.

Section 6 sets out methods of projection and of indication of the various views of an object.

Section 7 sets out methods of indicating section and provides information on conventions used in sectioning.

Section 8 sets out recommendations for dimensioning including size and geometry tolerancing.

Section 9 specifies conventions used for the representation of components and repetitive features ofcomponents.

Appendices provide information on the various projection methods, geometry tolerancing and comparison withother Standards.

NOTE: All drawings in this Standard are drawn in third angle projection unless otherwise stated. See Clause 6.3.3.

1.2 APPLICATION The basic principles given in this Standard are intended for adoption in the fields ofengineering, architecture, surveying, drafting technology, and education in the preparation and interpretationof technical drawings, diagrams, charts, and tables for the purpose of conveying technical information.

Technical drawings include such things as:

(a) Detail drawings.

(b) Assembly drawings.

(c) Plans.

(d) Illustrations.

(e) Schematic diagrams.

(f) Pictorial drawings.

(g) Installation drawings.

1.3 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS The following documents are referred to in this Standard:

AS1000 The International System of Units (SI) and its application

1100 Technical drawing1100.201 Part 201: Mechanical drawing1100.301 Part 301: Architectural drawing1100.401 Part 401: Engineering survey and engineering survey design drawing1100.501 Part 501: Structural engineering drawing

1103 Diagrams, charts and tables for electrotechnology1103.1 Part 1: Definitions and classifications

1203 Microfilming of engineering documents (35 mm)

1654 Limits and fits for engineering (Metric units)

2536 Surface texture

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 8: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 6

AS3702 Item designation in electrotechnology

B129 Designs for geometric limit gauges (plain and screwed in inch units)

B199 Undercuts and runouts for screw threads

ISO3098 Technical drawings—Lettering3098/1 Part 1: Currently used characters

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS

1.4.1 General Table 1.1 gives general abbreviations for words or word combinations which are in commonuse on drawings for engineering, architecture, and surveying. In accordance with recommended practice,upper-case letters shall be used except where otherwise indicated in the Table. Abbreviations which arerelated only to a specific discipline are given in AS 1100.201 for mechanical drawing, AS 1100.301 forarchitectural drawing, AS 1100.401 for engineering survey and design drawing, and AS 1100.501 for structuralengineering drawing.

Table 1.2 gives the decoding of the abbreviations given in Table 1.1.

Abbreviations should be used only where brevity and conservation of space make it necessary, and then onlywhen their meanings are unquestionably clear to the intended reader. WHEN IN DOUBT SPELL IT OUT.

NOTES:1 An abbreviation may or may not be recognized internationally.2 The abbreviations given in Tables 1.1 and 1.2 are not exhaustive. Other abbreviations and other meanings for those given may be

used, provided that —(a) their common usage in particular fields is clear;(b) the meaning is clarified on the drawing; or(c) the meaning is clarified in a reference document.

1.4.2 Use of abbreviations

1.4.2.1 Word combinations The parts of an abbreviation for a word combination shall not be isolated toderive an abbreviation for a single word or another group of words. Single abbreviations may be combinedwhen necessary if there is no abbreviation listed for the combination.

1.4.2.2 Syntax Unless otherwise indicated herein, the same abbreviation shall be used for all tenses, thepossessive case, participle endings, the singular and plural, and noun and modifying forms.

1.4.2.3 Punctuation Punctuation marks which do not appear in this Standard shall not be used with theabbreviation of a technical term.

1.4.2.4 Chemical elements Upper-case letters shall be used for the first letter of the abbreviation andlower-case for the second letter (where used).

1.5 SURFACE TEXTURE Information on surface texture related to technical drawings is given inAS 1100.201. For a more complete understanding of surface texture, reference should be made to AS 2536.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 9: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

7 AS 1100.101—1992

TABLE 1.1ABBREVIATIONS—ENCODING

Terms Abbreviation Terms Abbreviation

abbreviationabsoluteaccelerationaccess openingaccess panelaccordance withaccumulatoracousticacrylicacrylonitrile butadiene styreneactiveaddendumadhesiveaggregateagriculturalagricultural pipe drainairblast circuit-breakerair conditionair valvealternating currentamendmentAmerican National Standards InstituteanhydrousapproximateaqueousarrangementasbestosassemblyAssociation Francaise de Normalizationassumed datumatmosphereaudio frequencyautomaticauxiliaryaverage

bafflebaseplatebasinbathbearerbearingbenchmarkbitumenbitumen linedblockboardboiling water unitbottomboundary trapbracketbrassbrickbrickworkBrinell hardness numberBritish Standards Institutionbronzebucketbuildingbuilding linebulkheadbullnose

cabinetcadmium platedcalculatedcanopycantilevercapacitycasingcast ironcast iron pipe

ABBRABSACCELAOAPA/WACCACSTACRYABSAADDADHAGGRAGAPDABCBAIR CONDAVACAMDTANSIANHYDAPPROXAQARRGTASBASSYAFNORASSDATMAFAUTOAUXAVG

BAFBPLBBTHBRRBRGBMBITBLBLKBDBWUBOTBTBRKTBRSBKBWKHBBSIBRZBKTBLDGBLBHDBN

CABCd PLCALCCANCANTCAPCSGCICIP

cast steelcaulkingcavitycementcement linedcentre-linecentre of gravitycentre-to-centre, centrescheese headchamferchannelchrome-platedchutecirclecircuitcircuit-breakercircular hollow sectioncircumferenceclear glassclockclosed-circuit televisioncoatingcoefficientcold-rolled steelcold watercold-water tankcolumncompositioncompressioncomputer-aided design/draftingcomputer-aided engineeringcomputer-aided manufactureconcentratedconcentricconcreteconcrete blockconcrete ceilingconcrete floorconstantconstructionconstruction jointcontact adhesivecontourcontrol valvecoordinatingcornercorrectedcorrosion resistant (material)corrugatedcorrugated galvanized steelcountersinkcountersunk headcrestcriticalcross recess headcrown (of road)cup headcurrent transformercut-off valvecylinder

damp-proof coursedead loaddetaildiagonaldiagramdiameter

insidenominaloutside

CSCLKGCAVCEMCLCLCGCRSCH HDCHAMCHNLCPCHCIRCCCTCBCHSCIRCCGCKCCTVCTGCOEFCRSCWCWTCOLCOMPOCOMPCADCAECAMCONCCONCCONCCBCCCFCONSTCONSTRCJCACTRCVCOORDCNRCORRCRCORRCGSCSKCSK HDCSTCRITC REC HDCRNCUP HDCTCOVCYL

DPCDLDETDIAGDIAGDIA*

IDDNOD

* When used in association with a numerical value, the preferred method of expressing this abbreviation is by a symbol. (continued)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 10: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 8

TABLE 1.1 (continued)

Terms Abbreviation Terms Abbreviation

diamond pyramid hardness number (Vickers)dilutedimensionDeutsches Institut fur Normungdirect currentdisconnector trapdistancedistribution switchboarddraindrawingdwelling

eachearth (electrical wiring)earthenwareearthenware pipeeasementeduct venteffectiveefficiencyeffluentelectric, electricalelectromotive forceelevationengine, engineeringequivalentestimateexistingexpansionexpansion jointexternalextra-high voltageextra-low voltageextrude

fibre-reinforced plasticfigurefillister headfinished floor heightfinished ground heightfire alarmfire detectorfire extinguisherfire hose rack/reelfire hydrantfire indicator panelfire plugfire resistantfire service pipefire water serviceflangeflatfloorfloor heightfloor sumpflush fittingforwardframeworkfrequency

audiohighintermediatelowmediumultra-highvery-high

frequency modulated

galvanizegalvanized irongalvanized iron pipe

HVDILDIMDINDCDTDISTDSBDRDRGDWG

EAEEWEWPEMTEVEFFEFFEFFELECEMFELEVENGEQUIVESTEXSTEXPEJEXTEHVELVEXTD

FRPFIGFILL HDFFHTFGHTFAFDFEFHRFHFIPFPFRFSPFWSFLGFLFLRFHTFSFFFWDFWKFREQAFHFIFLFMFUHFVHFFM

GALVGIGIP

garagegas cockgas maingas metergas turretgate valvegeneral arrangementgeneral purpose outletgeometric reference framegradegrease trapgridgroundground heightgroupgully disconnector trapgully pitgully trap

handhardhardboardhardcorehardwoodhead

cheesecross recesscountersunkcupfillisterhexagonhexagon socketmushroomraised countersunkroundsquare

heaterheavy dutyheighthexagonhigh frequencyhigh pressurehigh strengthhigh-tensile steelhigh voltagehollow section

circularrectangularsquare

horizontalhose cockhot-rolled steelhot waterhot water unithydranthydrant pointhydraulichydrogen ion exponent

includeincorporateindicatorinduct ventinspection chamberinspection openinginspection pitinsolubleinsulated or insulationintegrated circuitinterceptor trapintermediate frequencyinternalInternational Electrotechnical CommissionInternational Organization for Standardization

GARGCGMGMGTGVGAGPOGRFGRGTGDGNDGHTGPGDTGPGT

HDHDHBDHCHWDHDCH HDC REC HDCSK HDCUP HDFILL HDHEX HDHEX SOC HDMUSH HDRSD CSK HDRD HDSQ HDHTRHDHTHEXHFHPHSHTSHV

CHSRHSSHSHORIZHCHRSHWHWUHHPHYDpH

INCLINCINDIVICIOIPINSOLINSULICITIFINTIECISO

(continued)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 11: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

9 AS 1100.101—1992

TABLE 1.1 (continued)

Terms Abbreviation Terms Abbreviation

International System of Units(Systeme International d’Unites)

intersection pointinvertinvert level (height)isolator

Japanese Industrial Standards Committeejointjunction

landinglatent heatleast material conditionleft handlengthlevelliningliquefied natural gasliquefied petroleum gasliquidlive loadlongitudinallouvrelow frequencylow pressurelow voltagelubricate

machinemain switchboardmalleable ironmanholemarkmasonrymaterialmaximummaximum material conditionmechanicalmedium pressuremelting pointmeter (instrument)minimummiscellaneousmixing valuemodificationmodulus of elasticitymodulus, sectionmoment of inertiamounting

negativeneutral (electrical)nickel platednominalnominal diameternominal sizeNorthnot to scalenumber

octagonoil circuit-breakeroil interceptor trapoppositeovenoveralloverhead

parallelparallel flange channelpartpartitionpassivatepattern

SIIPINVIHISOL

JISCJTJUNC

LDGLAT HTLMCLHLGLEVLNGLNGLPGLIQLLLONGLVRLFLPLVLUB

M/CMSBMIMHMKMSRYMATLMAXMMCMECHMPMPMMINMISCMVMODEZIMTG

NEGNNPNOMDNNSNNTS*

NO

OCTOCBOITOPPOOAOH

PAR*

PFCPTPTNPASSPATT

pedestalper annumphasepipepipelinephosphor bronzeplasterboardplate glassplywoodpneumaticpolytetrafluoroethylenepolyvinyl acetatepolyvinyl chlorideportionpositionpositivepotential differenceprecastprecipitate (noun)prefabricatedpreliminarypressurepressure-relief pipeprinted circuit boardprinted wiring boardpush-button

quantity

radiusrecovery pegrectangularrectangular hollow sectionreferencereference linereference markreflux valvereinforced concretereinforced-concrete pipereinforcementrelative humidityrelief valverequiredright handright of wayroadRockwell hardness

ABC

rolled-steel anglerolled-steel channelrolled-steel joistroundrunnel

safety valvesatin chrome platedschedulescrewsectionseptic tanksewersewer drainsewer ventsewer vent pipesheetsketchsoakage pitsocketsolutionspecificationsphericalspigot

PEDPAPHPPLPH BRZPBDPGPLYPNEUPTFEPVAPVCPORTPOSN*

POSPDPCPPTPREFABPRELIMPRESSPRPPCBPWBPB

QTY

RAD*

RPRECTRHSREFRLRMRVRCRCPREINFRHRVREQDRHROWRD

HRAHRBHRCRSARSCRSJRDR

SVSCPSCHEDSCRSECTSTSEWSDSVSVPSHSKSKPSOCSOLNSPECSPHER*

SPT

* When used in association with a numerical value, the preferred method of expressing this abbreviation is by a symbol. (continued)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 12: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 10

TABLE 1.1 (continued)

Terms Abbreviation Terms Abbreviation

spring steelsprinklersquaresquare headsquare hollow sectionstandardstandard temperature and pressurestationsteam trapsteelsterilizerstopcockstop tapstop valvestormwater drainstormwater pitstraightstreetstructural floor levelsurface levelswitchswitchboardsymmetry

tangent pointtank water leveltelephonetelevisiontemperaturetensile strengththermoplastic insulatedthreadtime switchtolerancetough plastics sheathedtough rubber sheathedtransformertransmittertransversetrue positiontrue profiletypical

ultimate

SPR STLSPRSQSQ HDSHSSTDSTPSTASTSTLSTERSCSTSVSWDSWPSTRSTSFLSLSWSWBDSYM

TPTWLTELTVTEMPTSTPITHDTSTOLTPSTRSXFMRTXTRANSVTP*

TP*

TYP

ULT

ultra-high frequencyundercutundergroundundersideuniversal beamuniversal bearing pileuniversal columnutility

vacuumvapour barriervapour densityvapour pressurevent pipeventilatorverandahverticalvery-high frequencyVickers hardnessvinyl tilesvitrified clayvitrified clay pipevolume

wallboardwash troughwashing machinewaste pipewater gaugewater level, waterlinewater mainwater meterwaterproof membranewith (combination form)withoutwoodwrought iron

yield point

zinc plated

UHFUCUTU/GU/SUBUBPUCUTIL

VACVBVDVPVPVENTVERVERTVHFHVVTVCVCPVOL

WBDWTWMWPWGWLWMWMRWPMW/........W/OWDWI

YP

Zn PLT

* When used in association with a numerical value, the preferred method of expressing this abbreviation is by a symbol.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 13: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

11 AS 1100.101—1992

TABLE 1.2ABBREVIATIONS—DECODING

Abbreviation Terms Abbreviation Terms

AABBRABCBABSABSACACCACCELACRYACSTADDADHAFAFNORAGAGGRAIR CONDAMDTANHYDANSIAOAPAPDAPPROXAQARRGTASBASSDASSYATMAUTOAUXAVGAVA/W

BBAFBDBHDBITBKBKTBLBLBLDGBLKBMBNBOTBPLBRGBRKTBRRBRSBRZBSIBTBTHBWKBWU

CACABCADCAECALCCAMCANCANTCAP

activeabbreviationairblast circuit-breakerabsoluteacrylonitrile butadiene styrenealternating currentaccumulatoraccelerationacrylicacousticaddendumadhesiveaudio frequencyAssociation Francaise de Normalizationagriculturalaggregateair conditionamendmentanhydrousAmerican National Standards Instituteaccess openingaccess panelagricultural pipe drainapproximateaqueousarrangementasbestosassumed datumassemblyatmosphereautomaticauxiliaryaverageair valveaccordance with

basinbaffleboardbulkheadbitumenbrickbucketbitumen linedbuilding linebuildingblockbenchmarkbullnosebottombaseplatebearingbracketbearerbrassbronzeBritish Standards Institutionboundary trapbathbrickworkboiling water unit

contact adhesivecabinetcomputer-aided design/draftingcomputer-aided engineeringcalculatedcomputer-aided manufacturecanopycantilevercapacity

CAVCBCBCCCCTCCTVCd PLCEMCFCGCGCGSCHCHAMCH HDCHNLCHSCICIPCIRCCIRCCJCKCLCLCLKGCNRCOEFCOLCOMPCOMPOCONCCONCCONCCONSTCONSTRCOORDCORRCORRCOVCPC REC HDCRCRITCRNCRSCRSCSCSGCSKCSK HDCSTCTCTGCTRCUP HDCVCWCWTCYL

DCDETDIADIAGDIAGDILDIMDINDISTDLDNDPC

cavitycircuit-breakerconcrete blockconcrete ceilingcircuitclosed-circuit televisioncadmium platedcementconcrete floorcentre of gravityclear glasscorrugated galvanized steelchutechamfercheese headchannelcircular hollow sectioncast ironcast iron pipecirclecircumferenceconstruction jointclockcement linedcentre-linecaulkingcornercoefficientcolumncompressioncompositionconcentratedconcentricconcreteconstantconstructioncoordinatingcorrectedcorrugatedcut-off valvechrome-platedcross recess headcorrosion resistant (material)criticalcrown (of road)centre-to-centre, centrescold-rolled steelcast steelcasingcountersunkcountersunk headcrestcurrent transformercoatingcontourcup headcontrol valvecold watercold-water tankcylinder

direct currentdetaildiameterdiagonaldiagramdilutedimensionDeutsches Institut fur Normungdistancedead loadnominal diameterdamp-proof course

(continued)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 14: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 12

TABLE 1.2 (continued)

Abbreviation Terms Abbreviation Terms

DRDRGDSBDTDWG

EEEAEFFEFFEFFEHVEJELECELEVELVEMFEMTENGEQUIVESTEVEWEWPEXPEXSTEXTEXTD

FAFDFEFFFFHTFGHTFHFHRFIPFIGFILL HDFLFHTFLGFLRFMFPFRFREQFRPFSFSPFWDFWKFWS

GAGALVGARGCGDGDTGHTGIGIPGMGMGNDGPGPGPOGRGRFGT

draindrawingdistribution switchboarddisconnector trapdwelling

earth (electrical wiring)modulus of elasticityeacheffectiveefficiencyeffluentextra-high voltageexpansion jointelectric, electricalelevationextra-low voltageelectromotive forceeasementengine, engineeringequivalentestimateeduct ventearthenwareearthenware pipeexpansionexistingexternalextrude

fire alarmfire detectorfire extinguisherflush fittingfinished floor heightfinished ground heightfire hydrantfire hose rack/reelfire indicator panelfigurefillister headflatfloor heightflangefloorfrequency modulatedfire plugfire resistantfrequencyfibre-reinforced plasticfloor sumpfire service pipeforwardframeworkfire water service

general arrangementgalvanizegaragegas cockgridgully disconnector trapground heightgalvanized irongalvanized iron pipegas maingas metergroundgroupgully pitgeneral purpose outletgradegeometric reference framegas turret

GTGTGV

HHBHBDHCHCHDHDHDHDHEXHEX HDHEX SOC HDHFHORIZHPHPHRA, HRB, HRCHRSHSHTHTRHTSHVHVHWHWUHWDHYD

IICICIDIECIFIHINCINCLINDINSOLINSULINTINVIOIPIPISOISOLITIV

JISCJTJUNC

LAT HTLDGLEVLFLGLHLIQLLLMCLNGLNGLONGLPLPGLUB

grease trapgully trapgate valve

hydrantBrinell hardness numberhardboardhardcorehose cockhandhardheadheavy dutyhexagonhexagon headhexagon socket headhigh frequencyhorizontalhydrant pointhigh pressureRockwell hardness (A, B, C)hot-rolled steelhigh strengthheightheaterhigh-tensile steeldiamond pyramid hardness number (Vickers)high voltagehot waterhot water unithardwoodhydraulic

moment of inertiainspection chamberintegrated circuitinside diameterInternational Electrotechnical Commissionintermediate frequencyinvert level (height)incorporateincludeindicatorinsolubleinsulated or insulationinternalinvertinspection openinginspection pitintersection pointInternational Organization for Standardizationisolatorinterceptor trapinduct vent

Japanese industrial Standards Committeejointjunction

latent heatlandinglevellow frequencylengthleft handliquidlive loadleast material conditionliningliquefied naturel gaslongitudinallow pressureliquefied petroleum gaslubricate

(continued)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 15: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

13 AS 1100.101—1992

TABLE 1.2 (continued)

Abbreviation Terms Abbreviation Terms

LVLVR

MMATLMAXM/CMECHMFMHMIMINMISCMKMMCMODMPMPMSBMSRYMTGMUSH HDMV

NNNEGNONOMNPNSNTS

OOAOCBOCTODOHOITOPP

PPAPARPASSPATTPBPBDPCPCB

PDPEDPFCPGPHpHPH BRZPLPLYPNEUPORTPOSPOSNPPTPREFABPRELIMPRESSPRPPTPTFEPTN

low voltagelouvre

meter (instrument)materialmaximummachinemechanicalmedium frequencymanholemalleable ironminimummiscellaneousmarkmaximum material conditionmodificationmedium pressuremelting pointmain switchboardmasonrymountingmushroom headmixing valve

Northneutral (electrical)negativenumbernominalnickel platednominal sizenot to scale

ovenoveralloil circuit-breakeroctagonoutside diameteroverheadoil interceptor trapopposite

pipeper annumparallelpassivatepatternpush-buttonplasterboardprecastprinted circuit board

potential differencepedestalparallel flange channelplate glassphasehydrogen ion exponentphosphor bronzepipelineplywoodpneumaticportionpositivepositionprecipitate (noun)prefabricatedpreliminarypressurepressure-relief pipepartpolytetrafluoroethylenepartition

PVAPVCPWB

QTY

RRADRCRCPRDRDRD HDRECTREFREINFREQDRHRHRHSRLRMROWRPRSARSCRSDRSD CSK HDRSJRVRV

SCSCHEDSCPSCRSDSECTSEWSFLSHSHSSI

SKSKPSLSOCSOLNSPECSPHERSPRSPR STLSPTSQSQ HDSTSTSTSTSTASTDSTERSTLSTPSTRSVSVSVSVPSWSWBDSWDSWPSYM

polyvinyl acetatepolyvinyl chlorideprinted wiring board

quantity

runnelradiusreinforced concretereinforced-concrete piperoadroundround headrectangularreferencereinforcementrequiredrelative humidityright handrectangular hollow sectionreference linereference markright of wayrecovery pegrolled-steel anglerolled-steel channelraisedraised countersunk headrolled-steel joistreflux valverelief valve

stopcockschedulesatin chrome platedscrewsewer drainsectionsewerstructural floor levelsheetsquare hollow sectionInternational System of Units(Systeme International d’Unites)sketchsoakage pitsurface levelsocketsolutionspecificationsphericalsprinklerspring steelspigotsquaresquare headseptic tanksteam trapstreetstop tapstationstandardsterilizersteelstandard temperature and pressurestraightsafety valvesewer ventstop valvesewer vent pipeswitchswitchboardstormwater drainstormwater pitsymmetry

(continued)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 16: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 14

TABLE 1.2 (continued)

Abbreviation Terms Abbreviation Terms

TELTEMPTHDTOLTPTPTPTPITPSTRANSVTRSTSTSTVTWLTXTYP

UBUBPUCUCUTU/GUHFULTU/SUTIL

VACVBVC

telephonetemperaturethreadtolerancetangent pointtrue positiontrue profilethermoplastic insulatedtough plastics sheathedtransversetough rubber sheathedtensile strengthtime switchtelevisiontank water leveltransmittertypical

universal beamuniversal bearing pileuniversal columnundercutundergroundultra-high frequencyultimateundersideutility

vacuumvapour barriervitrified clay

VCPVDVENTVERVERTVHFVOLVPVPVT

W/........WBDWDWGWIWLWMWMWMRW/OWPWPMWT

XFMR

YP

ZZn PLT

vitrified clay pipevapour densityventilatorverandahverticalvery-high frequencyvolumevapour pressurevent pipevinyl tiles

with (combination form)wallboardwoodwater gaugewrought ironwater level, waterlinewashing machinewater mainwater meterwithoutwaste pipewaterproof membranewash trough

transformer

yield point

modulus, section moduluszinc plated

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 17: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

15 AS 1100.101—1992

SECTION 2 MATERIALS, SIZES AND LAYOUT OF DRAWING SHEETS

2.1 SCOPE OF SECTION This Section specifies requirements for standard drawing sheets andcovers materials, designation, sizes, tolerances, and layout details. Certain information is also givenfor roll drawings.

2.2 TYPES OF DRAWINGS AND RELATED TERMINOLOGY

2.2.1 Drawing —a document consisting of one or more drawing sheets presenting informationpictorially or by textual matter (or both).

NOTE: A drawing is normally identified by a drawing number and title.

2.2.2 Arrangement drawing —a drawing depicting in any form of projection the relationships ofmajor units or systems of the item depicted. Arrangement drawings may be with or withoutcontrolling dimensions.

2.2.3 Assembly drawing —a drawing depicting an assembly or subassembly.NOTE: An assembly drawing is sometimes referred to as a general assembly.

2.2.4 Control drawing —a drawing that establishes parameters for the development, procurementor construction of an item, or for the co-functioning of items in an installation or layout.

Parameters include configurations and configuration limitations, performanceand test requirements,access clearances, and mass and space limitations.

NOTE: Control drawings may be further classified as envelope, specification control, source control, interface control,and installation control types.

2.2.5 Detail assembly drawing —a drawing depicting an assembly on which one or more partsare detailed in the assembly view or on separate detail views.

2.2.6 Detail drawing —a drawing depicting end product requirements for the parts delineated onthe drawing.

NOTE: Not to be confused with a ‘Detail’ (see Clause 6.3.8).

2.2.7 Diagrammatic drawing (or diagram) —a drawing delineating, by means of symbols andlines, the characteristics and relationships of items forming an assembly or system.

2.2.8 General arrangement drawing —an arrangement drawing where the item depicted is theend product.

2.2.9 Installation drawing —a drawing specifying complete information necessary to install anitem or items relative to the supporting structure or to associated items.

2.2.10 Monodetail drawing —a detail drawing delineating a single part.

2.2.11 Multidetail drawing —a detail drawing delineating two or more uniquely identified parts onthe same drawing sheet.

2.2.12 Tabulated drawing —a drawing showing similar configurations, parts, items or assemblieswith the variations in characteristics given in tabular form.

2.2.13 Electrotechnology drawings For electrotechnology drawings, see AS 1103.1.

2.2.14 Works as executed drawing —a record of work actually completed.

2.2.15 Assembly (subassembly) —a set of two or more items fitted together to perform a specificfunction.

NOTE: A subassembly is a portion of an assembly.

2.2.16 End product —an item, either an individual part, assembly, structure, or project, in its finalor complete state.

2.2.17 Flow chart —a diagram in which objects are shown in a simplified way by means ofgraphical symbols (and letter symbols) in order to make the functional relationships or the assemblyof an object clear.

2.2.18 Installation —a number of parts or subassemblies or any combination thereof fittedtogether to perform a specific function, in association with an appropriate structure or enclosure.

2.2.19 Part—one piece (member) or two or more pieces (members) joined together which cannotnormally be separated without destruction or impairment of designed use.

NOTE: A part is sometimes described as a component.

2.2.20 Part number —a number assigned to identify uniquely a specific part. See also Note toClause 4.2.2.2.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 18: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 16

2.2.21 System —a combination of parts and assemblies fitted together to perform a specificoperational function or functions.

2.3 MATERIALS Blanks or preprinted sheets for drawings and documents may be transparent,translucent or opaque, but should be matt on the drafting surface. Their quality shall be chosen toobtain the best contrast between background and lines. See also Clause 3.4.

NOTES:1 If adhesive overlays are to be used, consideration must be given to the effects of dust, heat and ageing as these may

result in defects in the reprographic process.2 Edge binding is not recommended unless the binding and the drafting materials are compatible for shrinkage.

2.4 SIZE OF DRAWING SHEETS

2.4.1 Preferred sizes The preferred size of drawing sheets shall be the ISO-A series for whichthe designation and dimensions are as given in Table 2.1.

Preferred size drawing sheets, with slightly wider borders to take account of preprintingconsiderations, shall have dimensions as given in Table 2.2. Such sheets shall be additionallydesignated by the prefix R, i.e. RA0, RA1, RA2, RA3, and RA4.

Where drawing sheets of a greater length are required, they should be selected from and havedimensions in accordance with one of the series given in Table 2.3. Such sheets shall bedesignated A3 × 3, A3 × 4, A4 × 3, A4 × 4, and A4 × 5.

2.4.2 Non-preferred sizes The non-preferred size of drawing sheets shall be the ISO-B seriesfor which the designations and dimensions are as given in Table 2.4.

Non-preferred size drawing sheets, with slightly wider borders to take account of preprintingconsiderations, shall have dimensions as given in Table 2.5. Such sheets shall be additionallydesignated by the prefix R, i.e. RB1, RB2, RB3, and RB4.

2.4.3 Roll drawings Standard widths of roll drawings shall be 860 mm and 610 mm. Lengthsof the roll drawing sheets shall be determined to suit the requirements of the individual drawings.

NOTE: Care should be taken to ensure that the chosen length of a roll drawing is suitable for microfilming (seeAS 1203), and for folding purposes.

2.4.4 Tolerances The cut sizes in Tables 2.1 to 2.5 shall be subject to the following tolerances:

For dimensions ≤600 mm—±2 mm.

For dimensions >600 mm—±3 mm.

Neither diagonal of any cut sheet shall exceed the diagonal of the appropriate maximum length andwidth, nor shall it be less than the diagonal of the appropriate minimum length and width.

For the purpose of checking the sheet sizes, the material shall be conditioned at 20 ±2°C at arelative humidity of 65 ±2 percent and measured under these conditions.

TABLE 2.1

DIMENSIONS OF PREFERRED SHEETS

Standarddesignation

Cut sheet dimensionsmm

A0A1A2A3A4

841 × 1189594 × 841420 × 594297 × 420210 × 297

TABLE 2.2

DIMENSIONS OF PREFERRED SHEETSWITH WIDER BORDERS

DesignationCut sheet

dimensionsmm

Ordering purposesonly Standard

RA0RA1RA2RA3RA4

A0A1A2A3A4

860 × 1220610 × 860430 × 610305 × 430215 × 305

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 19: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

17 AS 1100.101—1992

TABLE 2.3

DIMENSIONS OF ELONGATED PREFERRED SHEETS

Designation Cut sheet dimensionsmm

A3 × 3A3 × 4A4 × 3A4 × 4A4 × 5

420 × 891420 × 1189297 × 630297 × 841297 × 1051

TABLE 2.4

DIMENSIONS OF NON-PREFERRED SHEETS

DesignationCut sheet dimensions

mm

B1B2B3B4

707 × 1000500 × 707353 × 500250 × 353

TABLE 2.5

DIMENSIONS OF NON-PREFERRED SHEETSWITH WIDER BORDERS

DesignationCut sheet

dimensionsmm

Ordering purposesonly Standard

RB1RB2RB3RB4

B1B2B3B4

733 × 1019510 × 723361 × 510255 × 361

2.5 LAYOUT OF DRAWINGS SHEETS2.5.1 Size of borders2.5.1.1 Sheets without filing margin Where no filing margin is required, the drawing frame and its location inrelation to the edges of the sheet should be as shown in Figure 2.1.

NOTE: The borders shown in Figure 2.1 are of minimum size.

2.5.1.2 Sheets with filing margin Where provision for a filing margin is required, the drawing frame and its locationin relation to the edges of the sheets should be as shown in Figure 2.2.

NOTE: The borders and the filing margin shown in Figure 2.2 are of minimum size.

2.5.1.3 Roll drawings Where borders are required for roll drawings, the borders of sheets should conform to thedimensions shown in Figure 2.3.2.5.2 Print trimming line Where drawing sheets complying with Table 2.2 or Table 2.5 are used, a method ofindicating the print trimming line shall be marked on the sheets. This may be by means of broken lines forming aframe as in Figure 2.4 dimensioned to the cut-sheet dimensions of preferred or non-preferred series sheets specifiedin Table 2.1 or Table 2.4, or by other suitable methods of indication.2.5.3 Camera alignment marks Camera alignment marks shall be provided at the centre of each of the four sidesof the drawing sheet. Marks shall be in the form of an outline arrowhead pointing outwards and should be placedoutside the drawing frame. A typical example showing the allowable 6 mm wide tolerance zone for microfilm centringis given in Figure 2.5.The camera alignment marks on roll drawings shall be placed so that they comply with the requirements of AS 1203.The drawing information in the overlap regions of the microfilm frames shall be minimal.2.5.4 Grid referencing The provision of a grid reference system is recommended for all sizes, in order to permiteasy location on the drawing of details, additions, and modifications.The number of divisions should be divisible by two and be chosen in relation to the complexity of the drawing. It isrecommended that the length of any side of the rectangles comprising the grid be not less than 25 mm and not morethan 75 mm.The rectangles of the grid should be referenced by means of capital letters along one edge and numerals along theother edge. The numbering direction may start at the sheet corner opposite to the title block and be repeated on theopposite sides.The letters and numerals shall be placed in the borders, close to the frame at a minimum distance of 5 mm from theedges of the trimmed sheet, and shall be written in upright characters according to Section 4 (see Figure 2.5).If the number of the lettered divisions exceeds that of the alphabet, the reference letters with the extra divisionsshould be doubled (AA, BB, CC, etc).

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 20: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 18

FIGURE 2.1 SIZE AND LOCATION OF DRAWING FRAME ON DRAWING SHEETS WITHOUT FILING MARGIN

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 21: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

19 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 2.2 SIZE AND LOCATION OF DRAWING FRAME ON DRAWING SHEETS WITH FILING MARGIN

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 22: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 20

millimetres

Standard width ofroll *

W

Nominal width of borders Width ofrectangular

drawing frame

ATop and bottom

a

On both sides

b

860 29.5 20 min. 801

610 28 20 min. 554

* See Clause 2.4.3.

FIGURE 2.3 DIMENSIONS OF DRAWING FRAME—ROLL DRAWINGS

FIGURE 2.4 OVERSIZE DRAWING SHEET WITH PRINT TRIMMING LINE INDICATION

2.5.5 Sheet designation The sheet size designation number shall be indicated on the drawing, preferably in theright-hand bottom corner of the drawing frame (see Figure 2.6).Drawings prepared for microfilming shall contain means of determining the original size. This should be achievedpreferably by indicating the drawing frame dimensions. These may be shown outside the drawing frame near acorner (see Figure 2.6). Alternatively a graduated line at least 150 mm long should be shown in a suitable location(see Figure 2.8).

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 23: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

21 AS 1100.101—1992

2.5.6 Other information The following information should be displayed on each drawing sheet in a prominentposition as illustrated in Figures 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, and 2.9:(a) Indication of system of projection.

(i) For third angle projection, which is the preferred system, either —

(A)

or (B) 3RD ANGLE PROJECTION

(ii) For first angle projection, either —

(A)

or (B) 1ST ANGLE PROJECTION

(b) Prohibition of scaling —DO NOT SCALE

(c) Dimensional units —DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES

or other units as appropriate.(d) The Standard to which the drawing is prepared.

2.5.7 Fold lines Where required, fold lines should be indicated on drawing sheets according to the method offolding used.

2.5.8 Layout2.5.8.1 General Examples of layouts of drawing sheets are given in Figures 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, and 2.9. It is recognizedthat considerable latitude is necessary in the arrangement and position of title blocks, material and parts lists, andother text, and consequently the layouts illustrated should be regarded only as typical of practice. They may bemodified in detail to suit the needs of any particular organization.2.5.8.2 Detail drawings Figure 2.8 shows a sheet suitable for detail drawings. Normally, for production in quantity,only one part is shown on such a sheet, the size of which will vary to suit the actual part. The drawing and thecontents of the title block should provide all the information needed for the manufacture of the part and indexing ofdrawing.2.5.8.3 Assembly and multidetail drawings Figures 2.7 and 2.8 are examples of sheets suitable for assemblydrawings or for drawings which show a number of parts on the same sheet. In either case, only general informationis given in the title block, and particular information for the individual parts is tabulated in a material or parts list.

2.5.9 Title block Spaces shall be provided in the title block for the following information (see Figure 2.9):(a) Name of firm, organization, department.(b) Title or name of drawing.(c) Drawing number.(d) Signatures or initials and dates.In addition, the scale, method of projection, and other information considered relevant may be shown.The title block should be located in the bottom right-hand corner of the drawing sheets. For convenience of drawinglayout however, the top right-hand corner may be used (see Figure 2.8).The space for the drawing number shall be located in the title block near to the corner of the sheet. In addition, otherspaces for the drawing number may be located in other corners of the sheet or along the sides of the sheet to ensurethat it is visible when the drawing is filed or when a print is folded (see Figure 2.8).

2.5.10 Supplementary information It is recommended that spaces also be provided to the left of the title blockas may be required to provide for the inclusion of standard information relating to units of measurement, tolerances,key to machining and other symbols, treatment, finish, tool and gauge references, issue number or letter, revisioninformation, material specification, reference drawing numbers, and other details.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 24: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 22

2.5.11 Material or parts list Where several parts are detailed on the one sheet or an assembly of parts is shown,a tabulated material or parts list should be provided adjacent to the title block. Where the list is extensive or whenmore convenient, a separate sheet distinct from detail or assembly drawings may be used. Such lists should beprepared on standard size drawing sheets, with the same essential spaces as specified for the title blocks ofdrawings (see Figures 2.7, 2.8, 2.10, 2.11, 2.12, and 2.13).The list should also include the following information:(a) Items or part numbers.(b) Description or name of part.(c) Quantity required.(d) Material, material specification.(e) Drawing number of detail drawing.(f) Stores reference number, if applicable.The quantity column may be extended, as shown in Figure 2.10, where the same parts may be used in differentassemblies or groups, e.g. in different machines or different models.

2.5.12 Thickness of format lines The format lines specified in this Standard shall conform to the thickness givenin Table 2.6.

NOTE: Lines used in drawing practice are specified in Section 3.

TABLE 2.6THICKNESS OF FORMAT LINES

Features

Thickness of linesmm

Sheet size

A0

B1

A1

B2

A2, A3, A4

B3, B4

Border lines (see Clause 2.5.1) 1.4 1.0 0.7

Projection symbol (see Clause 2.5.6)

Principal lines in title block (see Clause 2.5.9)1.0 0.7 0.5

Grid lines (see Clause 2.5.4) 0.7 0.5 0.35

Camera alignment marks (see Clause 2.5.3) 0.5 0.35 0.25

Fold lines (see Clause 2.5.7) 0.25 0.25 0.25

Other format lines 0.35 0.25 0.18

2.5.13 Lettering in drawing layouts Lettering should comply with the requirements specified in Section 4.

2.5.14 Orientation of drawings The orientation of all tables, parts and lists, and drawings (including dimensions)shall be placed so as to read either from the bottom or right-hand side of the drawing sheet (see Figures 2.10 and2.11).

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 25: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

23 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 2.5 TYPICAL CAMERA ALIGNMENT MARKS, REFERENCE SYSTEM, ANDFOLD LINES FOR PREFERRED AND NON-PREFERRED SERIES DRAWING SHEETS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 26: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 24

FIGURE 2.6 TYPICAL LAYOUT OF A DRAWING SHEET WITHOUT PARTS LIST

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 27: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

25 AS 1100.101—1992

Figure 2.7 TYPICAL LAYOUT OF A DRAWING SHEET WITH PARTS LIST

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 28: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 26

FIGURE 2.8 TYPICAL LAYOUT OF A DRAWING SHEET WITH ALTERNATIVE LOCATIONOF TITLE BLOCK AND PARTS LIST

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 29: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

27 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 2.9 TYPICAL TITLE BLOCKS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 30: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 28

FIGURE 2.10 TYPICAL LAYOUT OF A PARTS LIST

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 31: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

29 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 2.11 TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FOR COMPONENTS—ELECTROTECHNOLOGY

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 32: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 30

FIGURE 2.12 TECHNICAL DATA SHEET FOR RELAYS—ELECTROTECHNOLOGY

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 33: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

31 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 2.13 TECHNICAL DATA CORRELATION SHEET — ELECTROTECHNOLOGY

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 34: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 32

SECTION 3 LINES

3.1 TYPES OF LINES Lines on drawings shall be selected according to their application. Preferred types areshown in Table 3.1 and shall be selected from one of the line groups given in Figure 3.1. Each type is designatedby a letter. Preferred types of the lines are shown in Table 3.1 and Figure 3.1 and typical applications in Figures 3.2to 3.18.

TABLE 3.1LINES AND APPLICATIONS

NOTES:

1 It is desirable to restrict line thickness to two on any one drawing. A medium thickness line may be used by some drafting disciplinessuch as structural and electrical for additional clarity. Refer to drafting standards for particular disciplines for examples.

2 It is recommended that only one thickness of dashed line be used.

3 Proportions of spaces are as specified for Type G.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 35: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

33 AS 1100.101—1992

3.2 DIMENSIONS OF LINES3.2.1 Thickness The thickness of lines shall be selected from one of the line groups given in Figure 3.1, and shallbe such that the thickness of any line after reproduction shall be not less than 0.18 mm.3.2.2 Dashes The length and spacing of dashes shall be consistent, but they may vary in length depending onthe complete length of the line and size of the drawing. Recommended dimensions are shown in Table 3.1.

FIGURE 3.1 LINE GROUPS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 36: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 34

3.3 LINE SPACING Parallel lines shall be drawn with a clear space between them of not less than twice thethickness of the thickest line, with a minimum space of 1 mm.Where a group of parallel lines intersect another group of parallel lines, the space between lines in each groupshould be not less than 2 mm.

3.4 LINE DENSITY To facilitate good quality reproduction of drawings using dyeline or microfilming processes, alllines on original drawings shall be matt, of constant density and have a high contrast with respect to the materialbackground.

NOTE: Contrast is the difference between the optical density of a line and that of the sheet. The optical density of a medium is ,log10

(I0)

(I1)where I0) is the amount of light falling on the surface of the medium and I1 is the amount of light passing through the medium.A suggested minimum value for optical density is 0.7.

3.5 TYPICAL APPLICATION OF LINES3.5.1 Type A Type A lines shall be used for the following purposes:(a) Visible outlines of features of an object (see Figure 3.3).(b) General details of structures (see Figure 3.4).(c) Landscaping and existing buildings in survey drawing (see Figure 3.2).(d) Busbars and transmission paths in electrotechnology (see Figure 3.5).3.5.2 Type B Type B lines shall be used for the following purposes:(a) Fictitious outlines, such as minor diameters of external threads and major diameters of internal threads (see

Figure 3.3).(b) Dimension lines and projection lines (see Figure 3.3).(c) Hatching (see Figures 3.3 and 3.4).(d) Leaders (see Figures 3.3 and 3.4).(e) Outlines of revolved sections (see Figure 3.3).(f) Imaginary intersection of surfaces (see Figure 3.6). Such lines should not meet the outlines.(g) Fold or tangent bend lines (see Figure 3.7).(h) Short centre-lines if Type G lines are not appropriate (see Clause 3.5.6).(i) General purpose electrical conductors and symbols (see Figure 3.5).(j) Line of intersection of principal planes (see Figure 6.18).See also Clause 3.6.3.5.3 Types C and D Lines of Types C and D shall be used to terminate part views (see Figures 3.3 and 3.4) andpart sections (see Figure 3.8).Type C is recommended for short break lines and for the S-break in cylindrical members in exterior views. Type Dis recommended for long break lines, and shall extend beyond the outlines which they terminate.Both types may be used in the one view (see Figure 3.3).3.5.4 Type E Type E lines shall be used to indicate hidden outlines and hidden edges.3.5.5 Type F Type F lines shall be used to indicate hidden outlines of internal features of an object that are nototherwise shown, or where their use would assist or is necessary in the interpretation of the drawing (see Figure 3.9).Features located behind transparent materials shall be treated as hidden parts.It is important to guard against excessive use of hidden outlines. They should be confined to the view or views inwhich they are needed.The following further requirements in the use of Type F lines are illustrated in Figure 3.9:(a) Hidden outlines should always begin and end with a dash in contact with the visible or hidden outline at which

they start and end, except where such a dash would form a continuation of a visible outline.(b) Dashes should join at corners, and arcs should start with dashes at the tangent points.(c) Dashes of parallel hidden outlines, when close together, should preferably be staggered.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 37: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

35 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 3.2 TYPICAL APPLICATION OF TYPES OF LINES — SURVEY

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 38: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 36

FIGURE 3.3 TYPICAL APPLICATION OF TYPES OF LINES—MECHANICAL

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 39: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

37 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 3.4 TYPICAL APPLICATION OF TYPES OF LINES—ARCHITECTURAL

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 40: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 38

FIGURE 3.5 TYPICAL APPLICATION OF TYPES OF LINES—ELECTROTECHNOLOGY

3.5.6 Type G Type G lines shall be used for centre-lines and pitch lines, and for indicating features in front of acutting plane (see Figure 3.10). They may also be used for indication of repeated details.Centre-lines of a feature should not intersect in the spaces between dashes.Centre-lines should project for a short distance beyond relevant outlines and, where necessary for dimensioning orcorrelation of views, they may be extended. For short centre-lines, Type G lines should be used with a long dashpassing through the feature and a short dash at each end (see Figure 3.9). A Type B line may be used for a shortcentre-line where there is no space for a dash or where there is no confusion with other types of lines.For use of this line for developed views, see Figure 3.7.Type G lines shall be used to show material to be removed, such as locating or holding bosses and lugs which aresubsequently cut off (see Figure 3.11).3.5.7 Type H Type H lines shall be used to indicate the location of cutting planes in sectioning and the viewingposition for removed views and removed partial views. The short arrowed leaders indicating direction of viewingposition should be located with the arrow touching and normal to the thick ends of the Type H lines (see Figure 3.3).3.5.8 Type J Type J lines shall be used to indicate that portion of a surface which has to comply with somespecial requirement. For example, Figures 3.3 and 3.12 require a surface which has to comply with some specialtolerance requirement or requires special surface treatment such as surface hardening detailed by a note.3.5.9 Type K Type K lines shall be used for the following purposes:(a) Outlines of adjacent parts (see Figures 3.3 and 3.13). Where an adjacent part is shown in section, hatching

should be shown only to avoid confusion and then only along the outlines.(b) Alternative and extreme positions of movable parts (see Figure 3.3).(c) Centroidal lines (see Figure 3.18(b)).(d) Tooling outlines. Alternatively, the component outline where tool drawings are involved (see Figure 3.14).

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 41: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

39 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 3.6 IMAGINARY INTERSECTION OF SURFACES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 42: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 40

NOTE: Section shown for hidden detail.

FIGURE 3.9 HIDDEN OUTLINE TECHNIQUES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 43: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

41 AS 1100.101—1992

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 44: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 42

FIGURE 3.12 SURFACE TO MEET SPECIAL TOLERANCE REQUIREMENTSAND SURFACE TREATMENT

FIGURE 3.13 ADJACENT PART

FIGURE 3.14 TOOL SHAPE IN OUTLINE

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 45: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

43 AS 1100.101—1992

3.6 SPECIAL APPLICATIONS OF LINES3.6.1 Representation of some plane faces A flat surface may be indicated by two diagonal Type B linesas shown in Figure 3.15.

FIGURE 3.15 INDICATION OF FLAT SURFACES

3.6.2 Representation of a rectangular opening A rectangular opening in a floor or a hatchway may beindicated by two diagonal Type B lines as shown in Figure 3.16.

FIGURE 3.16 REPRESENTATION OF RECTANGULAR FLOOR OPENING

3.6.3 Partial views of symmetrical objects Where it is desired to draw a symmetrical object as a fractionof the whole, the line of symmetry shall be indicated by two short parallel Type B lines, drawn normal to andat each end of it (see Figure 3.17).3.6.4 Other special applications Where special lines are used of types other than those shown in thisStandard, their purpose should be stated.

3.7 ORDER OF PRIORITY OF COINCIDENT LINES Where two or more lines of different type coincide,the following order of priority should be observed (see Figure 3.18):(a) Visible outlines and edges.(b) Hidden outlines and edges.(c) Cutting planes.(d) Centre-lines.(e) Centroidal lines.(f) Projection lines.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 46: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 44

FIGURE 3.18 ORDER OF PRIORITY OF COINCIDENT LINES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 47: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

45 AS 1100.101—1992

SECTION 4 LETTERS, NUMERALS AND SYMBOLS

4.1 LETTERS AND NUMERALS4.1.1 Character shapes and proportions4.1.1.1 General Characters shall be uniform and capable of being produced at reasonable speed by hand,stencil, machine, or other means. They shall remain legible and unambiguous in a direct photocopy print, ina reduced copy, and as an image on a microfilm-viewing screen.Characters shall be of simple form and preferably without serifs and other embellishments, and shall not beof exaggerated proportions.

NOTE: Clarity, style, size, and spacing are important, particularly for numerals as, unlike letters, they rarely fall into self-identifyingpatterns and hence are read individually.

4.1.1.2 Basic form The basic form of letters and numerals should proportionally conform to those illustratedin Figures 4.1 and 4.2.4.1.1.3 Freehand characters Although it is recognized that slight variationswill naturally occur with freehandcharacters, the characters should as much as possible conform to the basic forms given in Figures 4.1 and4.2.4.1.1.4 Stencil characters Suitable stencilled characters include the following types:(a) Upright Gothic.(b) Sloping Gothic.(c) ISO 3098/1 Type B Upright.(d) ISO 3098/1 Type B Sloping.(e) Microfont.

NOTES:

1 See Figures 4.1 to 4.5 inclusive.

2 ISO 3098/1 Type A characters which have a height equal to 14 times the line thickness are not normally used in Australia.

4.1.1.5 Machine made characters Machine-made characters as produced by mechanical means or atransfer process should generally comply with the basic requirements specified in this Standard.4.1.2 Height of characters The height (h) in millimetres (see Figures 4.1 to 4.5 inclusive) of charactersshould be one of the following:

2.5 3.5 5 7 10 14 20NOTES:

1 For special requirements, other heights may be used, provided that the minimum height complies with the requirements of thisClause.

2 The height of lettering used for tolerances shall be the same height as the particular dimension to which they are applying.

The recommended height of the characters should be not less than the height stated in Table 4.1 for the sheetsizes indicated. Where the drawing is to be reduced, the character height (h) shall be selected so that theheight as reproduced is not less than 1.7 mm.

TABLE 4.1

RECOMMENDED MINIMUM HEIGHT OF CHARACTERS ON DRAWINGS

Character use

Character height ( h), mm

Sheet size

A0, B1A1, A2, A3, A4B2, B3 & B4

Titles and drawing numbersSubtitles, headings, view and section designationsGeneral notes, material lists, dimensions

75

3.5

53.52.5

NOTE: The recommended minimum character heights are for upper-case lettering only. For upper-case andlower-case combinations, the minimum character height should be one size larger than that specified.

4.1.3 Thickness of character lines The maximum thickness of the lines used to form the characters shallbe 0.1h, where h is the height of the characters as shown in Figures 4.1 and 4.2 and as specified inClause 4.1.2. The line thickness of both lower-case and upper-case letters shall be the same (to facilitatelettering).

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 48: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 46

FIGURE 4.2 SLOPING GOTHIC (ITALIC) CHARACTERS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 49: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

47 AS 1100.101—1992

* Either of these characters is acceptable by ISO, but ‘a’ and ‘7’ are not recommended for use in Australia.

FIGURE 4.3 ISO 3098/1 TYPE B UPRIGHT CHARACTERS

4.1.4 Spacing4.1.4.1 Spacing of characters Characters forming a word or a number should be spaced so that thedistance between the characters (see Figure 4.6) is approximately twice the thickness of the line forming suchcharacters or 1 mm, whichever is the greater.Numerical values shall be expressed in accordance with AS 1000.4.1.4.2 Space between words The space between words shall be not less than 0.6h and should be notmore than 2h.4.1.4.3 Space between lines of lettering The space between lines of lettering shall be not less than 0.6h.4.1.5 Use of characters Only one style of character should be used generally throughout a drawing.Vertical characters should be used for titles, drawing numbers, and reference numbers.Upper-case letters should be used. Lower-case letters shall be used for conventional signs and symbolsnormally requiring such characters, e.g. mm, kg, kPa.Underlined lettering should be avoided. Special emphasis, where required, may be given by the use of largercharacters, or a change of style.Where necessary for clarity or to prevent misinterpretation between upper-case ‘I’ and lower-case ‘l’ and thenumeral ‘1’, serifs may be added.The letters ‘O’ and ‘I’ should not be used in combination with numbering owing to the liability of confusion withthe numerals ‘0’ and ‘1’.All characters in a drawing shall be kept clear of lines.

NOTE: Where a line precludes this requirement, the line may be interrupted sufficiently to accommodate characters (see Figure 4.7).

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 50: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 48

FIGURE 4.5 MICROFONT CHARACTERS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 51: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

49 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 4.7 CHARACTERS CLEAR OF LINES

4.1.6 Decimal form4.1.6.1 Decimal sign The decimal sign for technical drawings and associated documents should be the dot,either on the line or at midheight. An example is shown in Figure 4.8.The diameter of the dot should be twice the thickness of the line used to form the character, and shall be notless than the line thickness. It should be given a full character space.

NOTES:

1 The preferred location of the dot is on the line.

2 The decimal comma is commonly used in some countries.

4.1.6.2 Decimal fractions Where the quantity is less than unity, the decimal sign shall be preceded by zero(0) (see Figure 4.8).

0.45FIGURE 4.8 EXAMPLE OF DECIMAL FRACTION

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 52: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 50

4.1.7 Vulgar fractions The minimum height of the numerator and denominator of a vulgar fraction shallbe as given in Clause 4.1.2, and should be separated by a horizontal line. Where space is limited, a slopingline may be used.

4.2 ITEM REFERENCES4.2.1 General Item references shall be assigned in sequential order to each component part shown inassembly or detailed item on the drawing.Identical parts shown on the same drawing shall have the same item reference.Item references shall be cross-referenced to an item list giving the appropriate information of the itemsconcerned.Each complete subassembly to be incorporated in the assembly shown on the drawing may be identified byone item reference.4.2.2 Terminology4.2.2.1 Item—a non-specific term used to denote a unit of product including materials, parts, assemblies,structures, equipment, accessories and attachments.4.2.2.2 Reference (item) number—a number assigned to an item or detail on a drawing for the purpose ofcross-referencing to another drawing or a parts list, item list, or item description.

NOTE: For electrotechnology item designation, see AS 3702.4.2.3 Use Item references should generally be composed of Arabic figures only. They may be augmentedby capital letters when necessary.Item references on any one drawing shall have the same height of lettering. They shall be clearly distinguishedfrom all other indications by—(a) being double the height of those other indications; or(b) being enclosed in circles having the same diameter (see Figure 4.10).Where the relation between the item reference and its associated item is not obvious, the connection betweenthem should be shown by a leader line.Leader lines shall not intersect. They should be kept as short as practicable and generally they should bedrawn at an angle to the item reference. The leader line for circled item references shall be directed towardsthe centre of the circle (see Figure 4.10).For the sake of clarity and legibility of the drawing, item references should be arranged in vertical columns orhorizontal rows (see Figure 4.9).Item references of related items may be shown against the same leader line, e.g. bolt, nut and washer (seeFigure 4.9, Items 8, 9 and 10).Item references of identical items should only be shown once, except in special cases such as complicatedassembly where for clarity such references may be shown more than once.It is also recommended to arrange, as far as possible, the item references on the drawing in such a way asto facilitate their identification (see Figure 4.9).

4.3 SYMBOLS AND TERMINATORS4.3.1 General Where symbols and terminators are used in technical drawings, the size of characters andthe spacing of lines and characters shall comply with this Section together with Section 3.A comparison of the symbols used by ISO and those adopted by Australian and other national Standardsbodies is given in Appendix A.4.3.2 Terminology4.3.2.1 Symbol—a mark, character, letter or combination thereof which is accepted for indicating an object,idea or process.

NOTES:1 This applies particularly to SI units and their multiples, chemical elements, letter symbols for quantities, mathematical signs, and the

like.2 Letter symbols are the same in the plural as in the singular.

4.3.2.2 Terminator—a mark or character used for terminating leaders and dimension lines.4.3.3 Arrowheads Arrowheads shall be well defined. They may be open or solid and should comply withthe forms and proportions shown in Figure 4.11. The length should be from 3 mm to 5 mm.4.3.4 Dots4.3.4.1 Dots terminating line Dots used for terminating dimension lines shall be of a diameter that isapproximately 3 times the thickness of the dimension line which they terminate, but not less than 1.5 mm.4.3.4.2 Dots terminating leaders Dots used for terminating leaders shall be of a diameter that isapproximately twice the thickness of the leaders which they terminate, but not less than 1 mm.4.3.4.3 Dots used as decimal signs See Clause 4.1.6.1.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 53: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

51 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 4.10 NUMBERS FOR REFERRING TO ITEM LISTS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 54: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 52

FIGURE 4.11 ARROWHEADS

4.3.4.4 Use of arrowheads and dots In drawings of individual items, leaders from notes should terminatein arrowheads; however, in assembly drawings dots are preferred for the termination of leaders from notesand item numbers. Such dots should be within the outline of the items (see Figures 4.12 and 4.13).Where arrowheads are used to terminate leaders, the point of the arrowhead should touch the first point ofreference belonging to the particular item as illustrated in Figure 4.13, thus avoiding any misinterpretationwhere an outline is common to more than one item, e.g. that common to Items 8 and 9, and that common toItems 9 and 10 in Figure 4.13.On any one drawing, all leaders should have the same terminator, i.e. either dots or arrowheads.

NOTE: For arrowheads used to show direction of viewing, see Section 6.4.3.4.5 Slashes Slashes may be used on dimension lines in place of arrowheads, e.g. on architecturaldrawings, but slashes are not preferred.

FIGURE 4.12 LEADERS TERMINATING IN DOTS WITHIN THE OUTLINES OF THE OBJECTS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 55: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

53 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 4.13 LEADERS TERMINATING IN ARROWHEADS TOUCHING OUTLINES

4.3.4.6 Dimensioning and tolerancing Symbols used for dimensioning and tolerancing and their applicationsare shown in Figure 4.14. The dimensions of these symbols for the various values of the character height hare given in Table 4.2.Definitions of tolerancing symbols are given in Section 8.4.3.4.7 Graphical symbols For the shape and proportion of graphical symbols used in general engineeringand electrotechnology, refer to the appropriate Standards.4.3.4.8 Use of notes to supplement symbols Situations may arise where the desired geometric requirementcannot be completely conveyed by the symbols described. In such cases, a note may be used to describe therequirement, either separately or supplementing a geometric tolerance.

TABLE 4.2

DIMENSIONS OF SYMBOLS FOR DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCINGmillimetres

h 0.5h 0.7h 1.4h 2h 2.5h 2.8h 3h

2.53.55.07.0101420

1.31.82.53.55.07.010

1.82.53.55.07.01014

3.55.07.010142028

5.07.01014202840

6.38.8

12.517.5253550

7.0101420284056

7.510.51521304260

LEGEND:h = character height.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 56: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 54

NOTE: Sloping lines are at 60 degrees to the horizontal unless otherwise indicated.

FIGURE 4.14 SHAPE AND SIZE OF SYMBOLS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 57: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

55 AS 1100.101—1992

SECTION 5 SCALES

5.1 GENERAL Many technical drawings are drawn to scale. The scale to be chosen for a drawing shallpermit easy and clear interpretation of the information depicted.

5.2 TERMINOLOGY5.2.1 Scale—the ratio of the linear dimension of an element of an object as represented in the drawing tothe linear dimension of the same element of the object itself.

5.3 INDICATION OF SCALES5.3.1 Methods The complete designation of a scale on a drawing shall be by one of the following methods:(a) A ratio prefixed by the word ‘SCALE’, e.g. ‘SCALE 1:100’.(b) A block or graduated scale, e.g.

(c) Where the drawing is not drawn to scale, a note ‘NOT TO SCALE’ or a diagonal line drawn through thespace reserved for the scale ratio.

Where a drawing has no scale, a scale notation is unnecessary, e.g. a circuit diagram.5.3.2 Single scale Where only one scale is used in a drawing, it should be indicated in or near the titleblock.5.3.3 Multiple scales Where one scale predominates, the indication of that scale should be shown in or nearthe title block together with ‘OR AS SHOWN’, and other scales should be indicated adjacent to the view orviews concerned.Where more than one scale is used in a drawing, the scales shall be clearly shown adjacent to the view orviews concerned. A notation ‘SCALES AS SHOWN’ should also be indicated in or near the title block.Where different scales are used for horizontal and vertical dimensions, such as in road profiles, each scaleshould be clearly indicated on the drawing sheet, e.g.

HORIZONTAL SCALE 1:500VERTICAL SCALE 1:100

5.4 SCALE RATIOS5.4.1 Engineering and architectural drawing scales The recommended scales for use in engineeringdrawing practice and in architectural and building drawings are specified in Table 5.1.

TABLE 5.1ENGINEERING AND ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING SCALES

Category Recommended scales

Enlargementscales

50:15:1

20:12:1

10:1

Full size 1:1

Reductionscales

1:21:201:2001:2 000

1:51:501:5001:5 000

1:101:1001:1 0001:10 000

NOTE: If, for special applications, there is need for a larger enlargement scale or a smaller reduction scale than thoseshown in the table, the recommended range of scales may be extended in either direction, provided that the requiredscale is derived from a recommended scale by multiplying by integral powers of 10. In exceptional cases where forfunctional reasons the recommended scales cannot be applied, intermediate scales may be chosen.

5.4.2 Surveying and mapping scales The recommended scales for surveying and mapping purposes arespecified in Table 5.2.In addition the following surveying and mapping scales are currently in use and are acceptable for specialpurposes in certain areas:

1:125 1:400 1:750 1:8001:1 250 1:3 000 1:4 000 1:8 0001:12 500

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 58: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 56

TABLE 5.2SURVEYING AND MAPPING SCALES

Reduction ratios 1:2 001:2 000

1:2501:2 5001:25 0001:250 000

1:501:5001:5 0001:50 0001:500 000

1:1001:1 0001:10 0001:100 0001:1 000 000

5.5 LARGE SCALE DRAWINGS It is recommended that, for information, a full size view be added to thelarge scale representation of a small object. The full size view may be simplified by showing the outlines ofthe object only.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 59: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

57 AS 1100.101—1992

SECTION 6 PROJECTIONS

6.1 IDENTIFICATION Features, cutting planes, sectional views, sections and special views should beidentified by letters of the alphabet according to the following rules:(a) Letters I, O, and Q shall not be used.(b) When the other 23 letters have been exhausted, combinations of 2 letters shall be used, e.g. AA, AB, AC.(c) Letters or letter combinations shall be used only once on any drawing, irrespective of the purpose; e.g.

if ‘A’ is used to designate a view, it shall not be used on a feature, cutting plane, sectional view or section.(d) Identifying letters or letter combinations for cutting planes shall be applied at each end of such planes, and

in the corresponding notes for sectional views and sections the same identifying letters or lettercombinations shall be used separated by a hyphen, e.g. SECTION A-A, SECTION B-B, SECTION AB-AB.

Views shall be designated as shown in Figure 6.1.

View in direction A is designated: FRONT VIEWView in direction B is designated: TOP VIEWView in direction C is designated: LEFT SIDE VIEWView in direction D is designated: RIGHT SIDE VIEWView in direction E is designated: BOTTOM VIEWView in direction F is designated: REAR VIEW

FIGURE 6.1 DESIGNATION OF VIEWS

6.1.1 Views6.1.1.1 Top view (plan)—the horizontal section or projection of any object, such as a building, or theprojection on a horizontal plane of a site, building or component, viewed from above at right angles to theplane of section or projection.6.1.1.2 Side, front and rear view (elevation)—the projection on a vertical plane of any object, such as abuilding or component viewed at right angles to the plane of projection.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 60: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 58

6.2 TYPES OF PROJECTION A drawing of a component, assembly, structure, or part thereof shall bedrawn using one or more of the projection methods shown in Table 6.1.

TABLE 6.1

METHODS OF PROJECTION

Distinctivefeature

Projection typeApplication

Generic Particular

Parallel linesof sight

Orthogonal Third angle(preferred)First angle

Two-dimensionalmultiview drawings

Axonometric IsometricDimetricTrimetric

Three-dimensionalsingle-view ‘pictorialdrawings’

Oblique CavalierCabinetGeneral

Converging lines ofsight

Perspective One-point(parallel)Two-point(angular)Three-point(oblique)

6.3 ORTHOGONAL PROJECTION6.3.1 Terminology—Orthogonal projection The projection of an object in which the line of sight isperpendicular to the plane of projection. Figure 6.2 illustrates the derivation of the terms ‘First Angle Projection’and ‘Third Angle Projection’, as applied to orthogonal projection.6.3.2 General Third angle projection is the formation of an image of a view upon a plane of projectionplaced between the object and the observer. First angle projection places the object between the observer andthe plane of projection.

FIGURE 6.2 ORTHOGONAL PROJECTION

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 61: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

59 AS 1100.101—1992

6.3.3 Methods The two methods of orthogonal projection in use, known as ‘third angle and first angle’, areas follows:(a) Third angle projection Each view is placed so that it represents the side of the object near to it in the

adjacent view (see Figure 6.3).(b) First angle projection Each view is placed so that it represents the side of the object remote from it in

the adjacent view (see Figure 6.4).The third angle method of projection is preferred.All drawings in this Standard are third angle unless otherwise stated.The drawings shall be marked to indicate the method of projection (see Clause 2.5.6). The directions in whichthe views are taken should be clearly indicated.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 62: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 60

6.3.4 Selection of views6.3.4.1 Principle of selection Views shall be selected according to the following principles:(a) To reduce the number of views required to fully delineate the information to be specified.(b) To avoid the need for hidden outlines.(c) To avoid unnecessary repetition of detail.6.3.4.2 Disposition and number of views The normal disposition of views in third angle projections is shownin Figure 6.3 and that in first angle projection is shown in Figure 6.4. The number of views drawn shall besufficient to portray the shape of the object without possibility of misinterpretation. For many objects threeviews are sufficient. Any three adjacent views may be used.

NOTE: The views of Figures 6.3 and 6.4 do not necessarily define completely all features of an object. Full definition may requirethe application of other following clauses, the use of notes and sometimes, the use of sections.

Some objects may, however, be completely represented by less than three views where the information, whichwould have been given by the omitted views, is supplied by notes or other means. For example, some objectsmay be represented adequately even by one view if the necessary dimensions are suitably indicated (seeFigure 6.5).6.3.5 Deviation from method of projection Views deviating from the method of projection being used ona drawing shall be adequately titled. The use of sections instead of an outside view may obviate the need fordeviation.The direction in which the object is viewed shall be indicated by an arrow approximately twice the size of thoseused to terminate dimensions, and letters one size larger than the characters used in dimensions and notes.See Figure 6.6.

FIGURE 6.5 SINGLE VIEW DRAWINGS SUITABLY DIMENSIONED

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 63: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

61 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 6.6 INDICATION OF VIEW DEVIATING FROM METHOD OF PROJECTION

6.3.6 Partial views Partial views may be used where full views do not improve the full delineation of theinformation to be specified. The partial view shall be cut off by a continuous thin freehand line (Type C) orstraight lines with zig-zags (Type D). The principle of partial views may also be applied to auxiliary views (seeClause 6.3.7).Examples of partial views are shown in Figure 6.7.

FIGURE 6.7 EXAMPLES OF PARTIAL VIEWS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 64: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 62

6.3.7 Auxiliary views Objects having inclined faces may have such faces projected to show the true shapeof the inclined surface. The view is obtained by looking perpendicularly at the inclined face and projecting atrue shape view of it on to an auxiliary plane perpendicular to the line of sight.Auxiliary views should be drawn in third angle projection, irrespective of the method of projection usedthroughout the particular drawing.Examples of auxiliary views are shown in Figure 6.8 where (a) is a normal (perpendicular) auxiliary view and(b) is a removed auxiliary view. In the latter example, the removed view shall be identified and the directionof viewing shall be indicated. Its orientation should not be changed, but if this is also necessary, the numberof degrees through which it is rotated should be stated, as in Figure 6.8(c).6.3.8 Removed views and details Removed views (details) are auxiliary views removed from their trueprojected positions in order to provide added clarity. They may be drawn as full or partial views and the scalemay be the same as that of the main view or larger.Removed views to the same scale shall be identified and the direction of viewing shall be indicated by letter(s)(see Figure 6.8 and Clause 7.4.8).The element of the actual view of the object to which the removed view applies may be indicated by a circleor a rectangle drawn with a Type B line (see details on Figure 6.9). Removed views to a larger scale shall beidentified and the scale ratio shown.If the removed view is close to the element of the actual view, the circle or rectangle may be linked to theindicator by a leader (see details on Figure 6.9(b)).6.3.9 Rounded and filleted intersections Intersections between surfaces are often required to be roundedor filleted. An intersection of this nature, which theoretically shows no line, may be indicated by a conventionalline, the location of which should be at the intersection of the principal surfaces disregarding the fillet or round.The contour shall be shown as illustrated in Figures 6.10 and 6.11 (see also Figure 3.6).6.3.10 Views of symmetrical parts To save time and space, symmetrical objects may be drawn as afraction of the whole (see Figure 6.12).The line of symmetry is identified at its ends by two thin short parallel lines drawn at right angles to it (seeFigure 6.12(a), (b), and (d)).Another method is to show the lines representing the object extending a little beyond the line of symmetry (seeFigure 6.12(c)). In this case, the short parallel lines may be omitted.

NOTE: In the application of this practice, it is essential that due care is taken to avoid loss of understanding of the drawing.

6.3.11 Simplified representation of repetitive features The presentation of repetitive features may besimplified as permitted by Clause 9.3.1.

6.4 SPATIAL GEOMETRY6.4.1 Terminology Spatial geometry, or descriptive geometry, is the technique of solving three-dimensionalproblems by orthogonal projection onto perpendicular planes.6.4.2 The coordinate system The coordinate system is used to represent the location of a point in spaceby the use of three axes, viz x, y and z, with associated unit scales.The axes of the coordinate system are each orthogonal, with their relative orientation shown in Figure 6.13(a).The positive and negative direction on each axis are shown in Figure 6.13(b).The top view of the coordinate axes shall be used to represent unit dimensions on two axes only (seeFigure 6.13(c)). Lower-case italics shall be used to represent the position of a point in two dimensions. In thiscase the identification of the z-axis is omitted. This top view is used to describe points involving twodimensions.The unit values for the x, y, and z axes respectively shall be used to specify the coordinates for points inthree-dimensional space. The projection of a point A shall be as shown in Figure 6.14. For working with twoprincipal axes only to describe the position of a point, the unit values in x and y directions shall be specifiedfor the point which is (x,y), as illustrated in Figure 6.15.6.4.3 Principal planes Two perpendicular principal planes may be positioned relative to a point, line,plane,solid, or set of coordinate axes to provide viewing and reference planes for orthogonal projection. The twoprincipal planes shall be designated the ‘principal horizontal plane’ and ‘principal vertical plane’, or xy and xzreference planes respectively, as appropriate to the application.The projection of the principal trace(s) and points in a plane in two-dimensional space is shown in Figure 6.16.Principal planes may be positioned relative to the coordinate reference axes x, y, and z, so that two of thereference axes are parallel to one of the principal planes (see Figure 6.17).There is no restriction, upon the arrangement of principal planes relative to points, lines, and solids.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 65: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

63 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 6.8 AUXILIARY VIEWS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 66: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 64

FIGURE 6.9 REMOVED VIEWS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 67: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

65 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 6.10 ROUNDED CORNERS AND FILLETS

6.4.4 Notation of principal planes and points Notation identifying planes, lines and points may be usedto solve complex problems. The convention shall be as follows:(a) The principal horizontal plane shall be represented by the letter H.(b) The principal vertical plane shall be represented by the letter V.(c) Lines and points shall be represented by alphanumeric symbols, using upper-case letters for points on a

pictorial view, and lower-case for points on a projected view (see Figure 6.18(a) and (b)).(d) Where appropriate, subscripts shall be used to distinguish between two or more projections of a point (see

Figure 6.18(c)).(e) Where the projection of two or more points coincide, notation of the projected point(s) closest to the

direction of view shall take precedence (see Figure 6.18(c), projections to points avev and bvdv).6.4.5 Auxiliary planes of projection The intersection of two planes is known as a trace. Traces of principalplanes shall be represented by a Type B line (see Figure 6.19). For the special case of cutting planes, seeClause 6.4.6.Traces of auxiliary planes shall be identified by upper-case letters according to the reference planes whichhave been intersected, and in accordance with the sequence of these intersections (see Figure 6.20).6.4.6 Cutting planes Cutting planes shall be represented by a Type H line. Figure 6.21 illustrates thecutting of a solid by an auxiliary plane, simply inclined to the principal horizontal plane. The portion nearestthe plane of projection shall be shown removed in the adjacent view. When the true shape of sections areprojected, they shall not be hatched.

6.5 AXONOMETRIC PROJECTION6.5.1 Terminology—Axonometric projection —the projection of an object in which the lines of sight areperpendicular to the plane of projection and where the object is orientated so that its three principal axes areall inclined to the plane of projection (see Figure 6.22).6.5.2 Methods There are three methods of axonometric projection as follows:(a) Isometric—where the three angles between the projections of the three principal axes of the object on the

plane of projection form equal angles of 120°.(b) Dimetric—where two of the angles between the projections of the three principal axes of the object on the

plane of projection form equal angles and the third angle is different.(c) Trimetric—where the angles between the projections of the three principal axes of the object on the plane

of projection form unequal angles.Isometric projection is recommended for depicting objects having characteristic features in all directions;dimetric and trimetric projections are recommended for depicting objects having characteristic features in twodirections.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 68: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 66

FIGURE 6.11 ROUNDED AND FILLETED INTERSECTIONS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 69: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

67 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 6.12 SYMMETRICAL PARTS—OMISSION OF UNNECESSARY DETAIL

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 70: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 68

FIGURE 6.14 ILLUSTRATION ANDPREFERRED NOTATION OF A POINT

IN THREE DIMENSIONS

FIGURE 6.15 ILLUSTRATION OF PREFERREDNOTATION OF THE PROJECTION OF A

POINT IN TWO DIMENSIONS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 71: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

69 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 6.17 USUAL POSITIONING OF PRINCIPAL PLANES RELATIVETO THE COORDINATE AXES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 72: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 70

FIGURE 6.19 REPRESENTATIONS OF INCLINED PLANES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 73: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

71 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 6.21 PICTORIAL AND ORTHOGONAL REPRESENTATIONS OF A SOLIDCUT BY SIMPLY INCLINED PLANE

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 74: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 72

FIGURE 6.22 AXONOMETRIC PROJECTION

6.5.3 Choice of axes6.5.3.1 One principal axis The axes may be placed in a variety of positions. By convention the projectionof one of the principal axes of the object is selected as a vertical axis.6.5.3.2 Other principal axes Other principal axes are placed as follows:(a) Isometric projection The other two principal axes are fixed by definition.(b) Dimetric and trimetric projection It is recommended that in order to avoid the appearance of distortion

on large flat areas, the angle which that face makes with the plane of projection should be increased.It is also recommended that for more important faces of objects where details must be shown more clearly,the angle between that face and the plane of projection should be decreased.Figure 6.23(b) shows an improvement resulting from an increase in this angle because—(i) the horizontal plane is less distorted; and(ii) the vertical face is shown more clearly and with more detail.

Dimetric drawings may be orientated with the equal angles disposed on either side of any principal axis.6.5.4 Examples and guidelines6.5.4.1 Isometric drawing Figure 6.24 illustrates a typical isometric drawing of an object.Lengths parallel to the principal axes shall be drawn in true length to any selected scale, i.e. the ratio of equallengths on the axes shall be—

x:y:z = 1:1:1NOTES:1 The true axonometric projection of an object orientated as defined in Clause 6.5.1(a) is an isometric projection, and will be smaller

than an isometric drawing of the object because the scales parallel to all three axes are foreshortened in projection in the ratio 2: 3,i.e. 0.816:1 approximately.

2 For information on the representation of circles in isometric projection, see Appendix C.6.5.4.2 Dimetric drawing Figure 6.25 is a typical dimetric drawing of the same object as in Figure 6.24.Lengths parallel to the two principal axes shall be drawn in true length to any selected identical scale. Lengthsparallel to the third principal axis will be a different scale depending on the selected orientation.For convenience, the ratio of equal lengths on the axes is selected so that—

x:y:z = 1:1:0.5 (See Appendix C)NOTES:1 For information on the representation of circles in dimetric projection and special aids, see Appendix C.2 In many cases when the angle α is small, such as in Figure 6.25, a circle is sufficiently accurate instead of an ellipse in the segment

xy or in planes parallel thereto.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 75: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

73 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 6.24 ISOMETRIC DRAWING

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 76: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 74

FIGURE 6.25 DIMETRIC DRAWING

6.5.4.3 Trimetric drawing Figure 6.26 illustrates a typical trimetric drawing of the same object as inFigure 6.24.The length parallel to one selected principal axis shall be in true length to any selected scale. Lengths parallelto the other principal axes will be to two different scales resulting from the selected orientation.

NOTE: For information on special scales for use with trimetric projections, see Appendix C.

6.6 OBLIQUE PROJECTION6.6.1 Terminology—Oblique projection —the projection of an object in which the lines of sight are parallelto each other but inclined to the plane of projection where the object is orientated with the principal faceparallel to the plane of projection, thus making this face and parallel faces show in true shape. (SeeFigure 6.27.)6.6.2 Methods There are three methods of oblique projection, each dependent on the comparative scalesof the front axes and the receding axis, as follows:(a) Cavalier—the lines of sight make an angle of 45° with the plane of projection. The same scale is used on

all axes. Figure 6.28 is an example of this type of projection.(b) Cabinet—the lines of sight make an angle of 63°26’ with the plane of projection. The scale on the receding

axis is one-half of the scale on the other axes. Figure 6.29 shows an example of this type of projection.(c) General oblique—the lines of sight make any angle other than 45° or 63°26’ with the plane of projection.

For practical purposes, the angle should lie between 45° and 60°; under these conditions, the scale onthe receding axis will be between 1 and 0.5 times the common scale of the other axes. Figure 6.30 showsan example of this type of projection.

The projection of the receding axis on the plane of projection may be at any angle to the horizontal. Forconvenience, an angle of 30°, 45°, or 60° is recommended.

NOTE: For information on the effect of the angle of the lines of sight, see Appendix D.

6.6.3 Choice of method and orientation Cylinders and cones should have their axes on the receding axisto reduce distortion and to make it possible to draw circles in true shape. Distortion may be decreased byreducing the scale of the receding axis.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 77: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

75 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 6.27 OBLIQUE PROJECTION

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 78: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 76

FIGURE 6.29 OBLIQUE PROJECTION—CABINET TYPE

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 79: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

77 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 6.30 OBLIQUE PROJECTION—GENERAL

6.7 PERSPECTIVE PROJECTION6.7.1 Terminology—Perspective projection —the projection of an object in which thelines of sight convergeto a point of sight located so that the projection plane is between the object and the observer. (SeeFigure 6.31.)

FIGURE 6.31 PERSPECTIVE PROJECTION

6.7.2 Methods There are three methods of perspective drawings, each dependent on the orientation of theobject to the plane of projection, as follows:(a) One-point perspective or parallel—two of the principal axes of the object are parallel to the plane of

projection and the third, therefore, is perpendicular to the plane of projection.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 80: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 78

(b) Two-point perspective or angular—one of the principal axes (usually a vertical axis) is parallel to the planeof projection, and the other axes are inclined thereto.

(c) Three-point perspective or oblique—all three principal axes are inclined to the plane of projection.NOTES:

1 The only features that can be readily scaled are those of the object that actually lie on the plane of projection.

2 The plane of projection is also known as the picture plane (see Figure 6.32).

6.7.3 Examples and guidelines Figure 6.32 illustrates the general principles of perspective views. (Theexample shown is a two-point perspective.)Figure 6.33 illustrates the three types of perspective drawings.It is recommended that the point of sight should be located so that the cone of rays having its apex at thepoint of sight and including the entire object, has an angle at the apex not greater than 30°.Perspective drawings may be conveniently produced by photographic methods and grids.For architectural and CAD work where the object is close to the horizon, it is recommended that—(a) a greater angle be used;(b) the point of sight be located centrally in front of the object; and(c) the point of sight be located at sufficient height to show the desired amount of detail on the horizontal

surfaces.

FIGURE 6.32 GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF PERSPECTIVE PROJECTION

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 81: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

79 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 6.33 PERSPECTIVE DRAWING

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 82: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 80

6.8 OTHER DETAILS—PICTORIAL DRAWINGS6.8.1 Sectioned views Section planes should pass through centre-lines and should be parallel to one ormore of the principal planes of the object (see examples in Figure 6.34).Hatching of half-sections should be drawn in such directions that they would appear to coincide at the planeswhen folded together as illustrated in Figure 6.34(b).

FIGURE 6.34 SECTIONAL VIEWS AND HATCHING

6.8.2 Fillets and rounds Fillets and rounded edges may be emphasized by means of straight or curvedlines as illustrated in Figure 6.35.

FIGURE 6.35 FILLETS AND ROUNDS

6.8.3 Intersections Intersections should be drawn correctly and shownby lines as illustrated in Figure 6.36.

FIGURE 6.36 INTERSECTIONS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 83: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

81 AS 1100.101—1992

6.8.4 Screw threads Screw threads may be represented by a series of ellipses or circles uniformly spacedalong the centre-line of the thread. Screw threads should be evenly spread, but it is not necessary toreproduce the actual pitch (see example in Figure 6.37).

FIGURE 6.37 REPRESENTATION OF THREADS

6.8.5 Dimensioning Drawings shall be dimensioned where required by the same general methods as fororthogonal projections, although the scales vary with the method of projection used.Each dimension line, the associated projection lines and the line being dimensioned shall lie in the sameplane, as illustrated in Figure 6.38.Dimensions shall be inserted by one of the following methods:(a) Unidirectional—when all letters and numerals are read from the bottom of the drawing, as illustrated in

Figure 6.38(a).(b) Pictorial plane dimensioning—where all letters and numerals lie in one of the principal planes, as illustrated

in Figure 6.38(b).

FIGURE 6.38 DIMENSIONING

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 84: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 82

SECTION 7 SECTIONS

7.1 GENERAL7.1.1 Terminology—Section —the view of an object at the cutting plane which may typically include thatdetail beyond the cutting plane. (See Figure 7.1.)7.1.2 Method of indicating sections Sections are generally indicated by hatching of cut surfaces and alabel as detailed in this Section.7.2 CUTTING PLANES7.2.1 Selection Cutting planes should be selected to pass through the principal features of the object, andpreferably be shown through an external view and not through a section.Where the cutting plane is taken through a section, the resulting section should be drawn as if the originalsection was a full view.7.2.2 Indication—General Except where otherwise specified below, cutting planes shall be indicated byType H lines drawn right across the object. The direction of viewing shall be indicated by arrowheads, andidentifying letters as specified in Clause 6.1 shall be placed adjacent to the tail of arrows (see Figure 7.1).

FIGURE 7.1 SECTIONS

7.2.3 Indication—Other methods Where clarity is not impaired, the cutting plane line may be simplifiedas illustrated in Figure 7.2.A typical method of indicating sections in architectural and structural drawings is illustrated in Figure 7.3.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 85: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

83 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 7.2 SIMPLIFIED INDICATION OF CUTTING PLANE

Where the cutting plane is a principal plane of symmetry, the indication, other than a centre-line, may beomitted as shown in Figure 7.4.Where only one cutting plane is involved on a drawing, the identifying letters may be omitted.Where the resulting sections or sectional views are symmetrical or are drawn in correct projection as indicatedon the drawing, the arrowheads may be omitted (see Figure 7.18(a)).

7.3 HATCHING7.3.1 Single part The cut or broken surface of sections shall be indicated by hatching except where theintent of the drawing is clear without it and where indicated in Clause 7.3.5.It is recommended that as far as practicable, hatching should consist of a series of equally spaced Type Bparallel lines drawn at 45° approximately to the edge of the drawing sheet, as illustrated in Figure 7.5(a). Ifthe shape or position of the part is such that 45° hatching would be parallel to one of the sides, another anglemay be chosen, as illustrated in Figure 7.5(b). The lines should be suitably spaced in relation to the area tobe covered. Provided that there is no loss of clarity, wide spacing is recommended.Sectioning of different areas of the same part shall have hatching at the same angle and spacing (seeFigure 7.18).Methods of identifying particular materials by hatching, on architectural and structural drawings, are shown inAS 1100.301 and AS 1100.501.7.3.2 Adjacent parts Where two adjacent parts in an assembly are sectioned, the hatching on each partshould be at different angles, normally mutually at right angles, as illustrated in Figure 7.6(a).Where more than two adjacent parts in an assembly are sectioned, and it is necessary to clearly distinguishthem, such distinction may be made by varying the spacing of the hatching or by the use of angles otherthan 45° (see Figure 7.6(b) and (c)).7.3.3 Existing adjacent part Where it is necessary to show a section of an existing adjacent part, hatchingshould be shown only to avoid confusion, and then only along the outlines.7.3.4 Large areas Where large areas of sectioned material have to be shown, especially those hatchedfreehand, such as concrete, earth, rock, it is recommended that only the edges be sectioned, as indicated inFigure 7.7.7.3.5 Interruption for lettering and numerals Interruptions for lettering and numerals shall be carried outin accordance with Figure 4.7 and Figure 7.8.7.3.6 Thin areas Areas in sections which by virtue of the scale of the drawing are too thin for normalhatching such as structural shapes, sheet metal, packing, gaskets, damp courses and electrical insulation,shall be filled in solid, as illustrated in Figure 7.9.Where adjacent areas are similarly treated, a thin space of not less than 1 mm shall be left between them.7.3.7 Offset, contiguous, discontiguous, or curved sectioning In order to include features which arenot in a true plane, the cutting plane may be offset or curved so as to include several lines or curved surfaces.Discontinuities on cutting planes should not be indicated in section. Where the cutting plane is discontinuousor curved, the hatching should be continuous (see Figure 7.10).

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 86: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 84

FIGURE 7.3 ALTERNATIVE METHOD INDICATING A CUTTING PLANE

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 87: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

85 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 7.6 HATCHING OF ADJACENT PARTS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 88: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 86

FIGURE 7.9 HATCHING AS SOLID AREA

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 89: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

87 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 7.10 CONTINUITY OF HATCHING

7.4 SECTIONS7.4.1 General Sectional views should be orientated as for normal views in third angle projection (or firstangle as appropriate). See Figure 7.1.Each sectional view or section shall be identified with its appropriate cutting plane, where identified, byinscribing a subtitle below the view or section; e.g. ‘SECTION A-A’, ‘SECTION B-B’. See Figures 7.1 and 7.13.Where clarity is not impaired, either the subtitles SECTION or SECTION A-A may be omitted. See Figures 7.4,7.17 and 7.18.All hidden outlines in the section should be omitted except in special cases (see Figure 7.13).7.4.2 Full sections Where the cutting planes extend right across the object as in Figure 7.1, a full sectionis obtained.7.4.3 Half sections Objects which are symmetrical about a centre-line may be drawn having one half inoutside view and the other half as a section as illustrated in Figure 7.11.

FIGURE 7.11 HALF SECTION

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 90: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 88

7.4.4 Local or part sections Local or part sections may be taken at convenient places on the actual viewof the object to show hidden detail, the boundary of such sections being shown by a Type C line, as illustratedin Figure 7.12 (see also Figure 3.8).

FIGURE 7.12 LOCAL OR PART SECTION

7.4.5 Aligned sections Aligned sections are the result of using discontinuous or curved cutting planes asstated in Clause 7.3.7 where the ends of the cutting plane are not parallel. In these cases, the non-parallelplane shall be revolved into the plane of projection. Figure 7.13 shows examples of an aligned section A-Aand an auxiliary aligned section B-B.7.4.6 Revolved sections Revolved sections show the shape of the cross-section in the actual view of theobject, the cutting plane being revolved in position, as illustrated in Figure 7.14. The outline of a revolvedsection shall be a thin line, i.e. Type B. Further identification is unnecessary.7.4.7 Interposed sections Interposed sections are similar to revolved sectionswith the otherdrawing detailin the immediate vicinity of the sections removed. An example is shown in Figure 7.15. The outline of aninterposed section shall be a Type A line. Further identification is unnecessary.7.4.8 Removed sections7.4.8.1 Usual method Removed sections are similar to revolved sections except that the cross-sections areremoved from the actual view of the object. The sections are placed on centre-lines extending from the cuttingplane. An example is shown in Figure 7.16. The outline of a removed section shall be a Type A line. Furtheridentification is unnecessary.A removed section may be enlarged and the scale indicated.7.4.8.2 Alternative methods If the method described in Clause 7.4.8.1 is not practicable, the section orsectional views may be removed to some other convenient position on the drawing. Such a section shall beclearly identified and labelled as a section, unless there is no possibility of misinterpretation. The section maybe rotated in the same manner as a rotated removed auxiliary view (see Figure 7.17(b)).This also applies to sectional views.

NOTES:

1 Figures 7.17(a) and (b) are alternative methods. Only one method should be used.

2 Figure 7.17(a) shows a removed section, translated without rotation.

3 Figure 7.17(b) shows a removed section, translated and rotated. This method should only be used when space is restricted.

7.4.8.3 Disposition of successive sections If, through lack of space, successive sections cannot be arrangedin normal projection as illustrated in Figure 7.18(a), the arrangement as removed sections illustrated inFigure 7.18(b) may be used.7.4.9 Other conventions used in sectioning7.4.9.1 Fastening elements Where the cutting plane through an assembly contains the centre-line offastening elements such as bolts, pins, rivets, keys, washers, nuts, screws, or other elements such as shafts,rods, ball and roller bearings, and similar shapes which in themselves do not require sectioning, the elementsshall not be sectioned but shall be shown in full outline (see Figure 7.19).

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 91: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

89 AS 1100.101—1992

NOTE: For explanation of double-spaced hatching on the right-hand side of section A-A, see Clause 7.4.9.2.

FIGURE 7.13 ALIGNED AND AUXILIARY ALIGNED SECTIONAL VIEWS

7.4.9.2 Relatively thin elements Where the cutting plane through an object passes longitudinally througha relatively thin element of the object such as a web, rib, lug or spoke, the outline of the feature may be drawnwithout hatching in order to avoid a false impression of solidity (see Figure 7.20).Alternatively, the hatching between the outline of the thin element and the main body may be double-spaced,as shown in Figure 7.13. This is recommended where other similar thin sections are involved on the part whichis shown in sectional view. Where this method is used, the boundary between the thin and thick sections shallbe shown as a hidden outline.Where sections do not cut the rib or spoke, e.g. a wheel with three spokes, the oblique spoke should be drawnas being on the cutting plane.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 92: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 90

FIGURE 7.15 INTERPOSED SECTIONS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 93: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

91 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 7.17 PLACEMENT OF SECTIONAL VIEWS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 94: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 92

FIGURE 7.19 SECTION WITH AXIAL FEATURES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 95: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

93 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 7.20 WEB IN LONGITUDINAL SECTION NOT HATCHED

7.4.9.3 Holes In a sectional view of an element, holes may be shown, even if not in the cutting plane. Holesin circular elements should be shown at the true pitch from the centre rather than at the projected distance(see Figure 7.21).

FIGURE 7.21 HOLES IN ELEMENTS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 96: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 94

7.4.9.4 Features located in front of a cutting plane Where it is necessary to represent features located infront of the cutting plane, these features should be indicated with Type G lines (see Figure 3.10).The representation of features located in front of cutting planes is not recommended for drawings of machineparts.7.4.9.5 Breaks Break lines as illustrated in Figure 7.22 may be used to shorten a view of elongated objects.The lines shall be Type C or Type D.

NOTE: Long break lines may be at any convenient angle with outlines or centre-lines of objects or assemblies, provided that clarityor interpretation of the view is not impaired.

FIGURE 7.22 USE OF BREAK LINES ON ELONGATED OBJECTS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 97: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

95 AS 1100.101—1992

SECTION 8 DIMENSIONING

8.1 SCOPE This Section sets out recommendations for the dimensioning, including size and geometrytolerancing, of technical drawings.These recommendations relate to drawings which define products in their completely finished state as requiredby the designer. Such drawings do not necessarily define the manufacturing methods which may be used tocomply with the design requirements. Many of the principles and practices, however, can be applied to processdrawings which may define products in a partly finished state.The tolerances for form, location, and orientation are indicated on the drawing by using symbolic notation toidentify the group, the characteristic to be toleranced, the magnitude of the tolerance, and the applicabledatums.Practices unique to architecture, civil, surveying, electrical, and mechanical engineering, as well as weldingand surface texture, are included in the appropriate Standards.8.1.1 Terminology8.1.1.1 Dimension—(a) a characteristic such as length or angle, of which the magnitude is specified in the appropriate unit of

measurement; or(b) the numerical value used on the drawing or specification to define the size of the characteristic in Item (a)

(see Figure 8.12).8.1.1.2 Tolerance—the total amount of variation permitted for the size of a dimension, a positionalrelationship, or the form of a profile, or other design requirement.8.1.2 Fundamental rules Dimensioning and tolerancing shall clearly define intent and shall comply withthe following:(a) Each necessary dimension of an end product shall be specified. No more dimensions than those

necessary for complete definition shall be given. The use of auxiliary dimensions on a drawing shall beminimized.

(b) Dimensions shall be selected and arranged to suit the function and mating relationship of a part, and shallnot be subject to more than one interpretation. Such dimensions are termed functional dimensions.

(c) The drawing should define a part without specifying construction and inspection methods. Thus, only thediameter of a hole is given without indicating whether it is to be drilled, reamed, punched, or made by anyother operation. However, in those instances where manufacturing, processing, quality assurance, orenvironmental information is essential to the definition of requirements, it shall be specified on the drawingor in a document referenced on the drawing.

(d) Dimensions should be arranged to provide required information for optimum readability. Dimensions shouldbe shown in true profile views and refer to visible outlines.

(e) A 90° angle is implied where centre-lines and lines depicting features are shown on a drawing at rightangles and no angle is specified.

(f) A 90° basic angle applies where centre-lines of features in a pattern, or surfaces shown at right angles,on the drawing are located or defined by basic dimensions and no angle is specified.

(g) Unless otherwise specified, all dimensions are applicable at 20°C. Compensation may be made formeasurements made at other temperatures.

(h) Each dimension should have a tolerance, except for those dimensions specifically identified as basic,auxiliary, maximum or minimum. The tolerance may be applied directly to the dimension (or indirectly inthe case of basic dimensions), indicated by a general note, or located in a supplementary block of thedrawing layout. (See Clause 8.3.8.3.)

(i) Dimensions for size, form, orientation, and location of features shall be complete to the extent that thereis full understanding of the characteristics of each feature. Neither scaling (measuring the size of a featuredirectly from a technical drawing) nor assumption of a distance or size is permitted.

(j) Geometry tolerance shall be specified where essential, i.e. in light of functional requirements,interchangeability, and probable manufacturing circumstances.NOTE: Undimensioned drawings (e.g. loft, printed wiring, templates, master layouts, tooling layout maps) prepared on stable materialare excluded, provided that the necessary control dimensions are specified.

8.2 GENERAL DIMENSIONING8.2.1 Dimensioning symbols Some general symbols used for dimensioning and tolerancing and theirapplication are given in Table 8.1. The shape and size of these symbols are given in Figure 4.14.8.2.2 Terminology8.2.2.1 Functional dimension—a dimension which directly affects the functioning of the product. (SeeFigures 8.1 and 8.2.)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 98: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 96

FIGURE 8.2 EXAMPLE OF FUNCTIONAL DIMENSIONS FOR KITCHEN CUPBOARD

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 99: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

97 AS 1100.101—1992

TABLE 8.1DEFINITION AND APPLICATION OF DIMENSIONING SYMBOLS

Symbol Application

Indicates that a dimension refers to the diameter of a circle or cylinder. It shall be placed in front of thedimension.

Indicates that a dimension refers to a radius of part of a circle or cylinder. It shall be placed in front ofthe dimension.

Indicates that a dimension refers to the width across flats of a square section. It shall be placed in frontof the dimension.

Indicates a taper and its direction. The centre-lines shall be parallel with the axis or plane of symmetryof the tapered feature. It shall be placed in front of the slope ratio.

Indicates a slope and its direction. The base shall be parallel to the datum plane. It shall be placed infront of the slope ratio.

Indicates the centre-line of a part, feature, or group of features. It shall be located adjacent to, or on,the centre-line.

Indicates the diameter of spherical surface. It shall be placed in front of the dimension.

Indicates the radius of a spherical surface. It shall be placed in front of the dimension.

Indicates countersink. It shall be placed in front of the dimension.

Indicates counterbore or spotface. It shall be placed in front of the dimension.

Indicates depth of a feature. It shall be placed in front of the dimension.

Indicates that a dimension refers to the arc length. It shall be placed above the dimension.

8.2.3 Projection and dimension lines and leaders8.2.3.1 Projection lines Projection lines shall be Type B lines (see Table 3.1) projected from points, lines,or surfaces to enable the dimensions to be placed outside the outline wherever possible.Projection lines shall extend a little beyond the dimension line.Where projection lines are extensions of outlines, they shall start just clear of the outlines.Figure 8.3 illustrates these features and shows recommended dimensions for the extension beyond thedimension line and the clearance mentioned above.Where projection lines refer to points on surfaces or lines, they shall pass through or terminate on the pointsas shown in Figure 8.4, and, for clarity, oblique projection lines may be used as shown.Where projection lines refer to imaginary points of intersection, they shall pass through or terminate on thepoints as shown in Figure 8.5, and the points may be emphasized by dots as shown.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 100: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 98

FIGURE 8.4 PROJECTION LINES FROM POINTS ON SURFACES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 101: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

99 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.5 IMAGINARY POINTS OF INTERSECTIONEMPHASIZED BY PROMINENT DOTS

8.2.3.2 Dimension lines Dimension lines shall be Type B lines drawn parallel to the direction of measurementand, wherever practicable, shall be placed outside the view of the object, as in Figure 8.3. The space betweenthe first dimension line and part outline should not be less than 3h; the spaces between succeeding dimensionlines should not be less than 2h (where h equals the character height). Dimension lines may be interruptedfor the insertion of the dimensions when using the aligned method, and they shall be interrupted wherenecessary when using the unidirectional method (see Clause 8.2.5.1). Arrowheads shall conform toClause 4.3.3, and shall touch the projection or other limiting line.Where several dimensions are to be given from a common surface, line or point, one of the methods shownin Figure 8.6 shall be used. Where Method (b) or Method (c) is used, a prominent dot shall be placed on thecommon line.If the surface, line or point is a datum for the dimensions (including basic dimensions) then the dot is replacedby a datum indicator symbol (see Clause 8.3.3.5 and Figure 8.51).The dimension lines and arrowheads in Figure 8.6(b) may be omitted.Where there are several parallel dimension lines given from a common line, the dimensions shall, wherepracticable, be placed near the arrowhead remote from the common line (see Figure 8.6(a)).A centre-line, or a line which is an extension of a centre-line or of an outline, shall not be used as a dimensionline (see Figure 8.7).8.2.3.3 Leaders A leader is a line used in conjunction with a terminator to indicate where dimension notes,item numbers, or feature identifications are intended to apply (see Figure 8.8). Leaders shall be Type B lines.A leader used to indicate where a dimension applies shall originate at either the beginning or the end of thedimension and terminate in an arrowhead (see Figures 8.7 and 8.19(a)). A leader indicating a dimension mayterminate on the dimension line without an arrowhead (see Figure 8.8(b)).A leader from a note may terminate in an arrowhead (see Figure 8.8(a)) or in a dot (see Figure 8.8(c)),whichever is appropriate.Arrowheads shall always terminate on a line and dots shall be within the outlines of the object. Arrowheadsshall conform to Clause 4.3.4.Leaders shall not be visually parallel to adjacent dimension lines or projection lines, and shall be nearly normaland not more than 45° from the normal to the lines to which they refer (see Figure 8.9).Long leaders should be avoided even if it means dimensioning identical features as in Figure 8.10(a) or usingletter symbols adjacent to the features as shown in Figure 8.11(a).Dimensional information may be shown by leaders as in the left-hand figure of Figure 8.11.8.2.4 Dimensions8.2.4.1 Numerical values The decimal sign should be a dot in accordance with Clause 4.1.6.1.Dimensions should be expressed to the full number of decimal places necessary for complete definition of thedesign requirements. Where the quantity is less than one, the decimal sign shall be preceded by zero, e.g.

0.25A full space shall divide each group of three numerals to the right or to the left of the decimal sign, e.g.

125 000 2 500 2.498 5 2.498 55NOTE: For further information of presentation of numerical values, see AS 1000.

Where a dimension is an integral number of units, both the decimal sign and the zeros following the decimalsign shall be omitted, e.g.

50 not 50.0Numerical values shall be clearly indicated adjacent to a dimension line or a leader or in a note.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 102: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 100

FIGURE 8.7 CENTRE-LINES AND EXTENSION LINES NOT TO BE USED AS DIMENSION LINES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 103: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

101 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.9 LEADERS TOUCHING LINES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 104: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 102

8.2.4.2 Linear dimensions Linear dimensions consist of two elements, the numerical value and the unit ofmeasurement.The preferred unit for linear dimensions on drawings shall be the millimetre.Units shall be clearly indicated by one of the following methods:(a) Where only one unit is used — by the display of a prominent note, e.g.

DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES(b) Where two or more units are used, but one unit occurs more frequently than the other unit(s) —

(i) most frequently used unit — by a prominent note, e.g.UNLESS OTHERWISE STATEDDIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES

(ii) other unit(s) — by placing the appropriate unit symbol after the numerical value, separated by asingle space, e.g.

14 m(c) Where neither (a) nor (b) applies — by placing the appropriate unit symbol after the numerical value,

separated by a single space.8.2.4.3 Angular dimensions Angular dimensions shall be expressed either in degrees and decimal partsthereof, in degrees and minutes, or in degrees, minutes and seconds, e.g.

22.5° 22°30’ 2°30’30” 2°4’5Where an angle is less than one degree it shall be expressed as follows —

0.5° 0°30’ 0°30’30” 0°0’30”Angles of 90° need not be dimensioned unless required for clarity.Leading zeros may be used before minutes and seconds when these figures are less than 10, e.g.

2°04’05”

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 105: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

103 AS 1100.101—1992

8.2.5 Arrangement of dimensions8.2.5.1 General General criteria for the arrangement of dimensions are as follows:(a) Dimensions shall be placed on drawings using either the unidirectional method (see Figure 8.12(a) and

(c)) or the aligned method (see Figure 8.12(b) and (c)). In the unidirectional method, dimensions areinscribed parallel to the bottom edge of the drawing, with vertical or inclined dimension lines beinginterrupted for insertion of dimensions, if space permits. In the aligned method, each dimension is inscribedparallel to its dimension line so as to be read from the bottom edge or from the right side of the drawingavoiding the hatched area shown.Dimensions and notes shown with leaders shall be inscribed by the unidirectional method (see Figure8.12(a)).NOTE: Drawings and sketches for use in publications such as handbooks should be dimensioned by the unidirectional method.

(b) Where there are several parallel dimension lines, the dimensions should be staggered for clarity as inFigure 8.13.

(c) Overall dimensions shall be placed outside the intermediate dimensions as in Figure 8.14.(d) Various methods of dimensioning narrow spaces are shown in Figure 8.12.(e) The free or floating end of a dimension line defining a feature not completely shown on a drawing shall

be terminated by a double arrowhead (see example in Figure 8.22).8.2.5.2 Tabular presentation of dimensions Where there are a number of features on a single drawingdefined by coordinates from X and Y datums, the dimensions of each feature may be given in tabular form(see Figure 8.15).Where one drawing is used to specify the dimensional requirements of a number of parts with similarconfigurations, the dimensions may be given in tabular form (see Figure 8.16).

FIGURE 8.12 PLACING OF DIMENSIONS IN RELATION TO DIMENSION LINES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 106: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 104

FIGURE 8.14 OVERALL DIMENSIONS PLACED OUTSIDE INTERMEDIATE DIMENSIONS

8.2.5.3 Not-to-scale dimensions Where it is necessary or desirable to indicate that a particular dimension isnot to scale, the dimension shall be underlined with a full thick line, i.e. Type A (see dimension ∅ 49 inFigure 8.14).Dimensions over breaks, dimensions locating inconveniently placed centres and associated radii, anddimensions which from the context of the drawing or by method of inscription may not be to scale shall notbe underlined.8.2.5.4 Terminology — Auxiliary dimension An auxiliary dimension is a dimension given solely for informationor reference, but which is not necessary for function or assembly.8.2.5.5 Auxiliary dimensions — General Where the overall dimension is shown, one of the intermediatedimensions is redundant, and shall not be dimensioned (see Figure 8.14). Exceptions may be made wheresuch dimensions would provide useful information, in which case they should be given as ‘auxiliary’dimensions. Where all the intermediate dimensions are shown, the overall dimension should generally be givenas an auxiliary dimension. (See Figure 8.17.)Auxiliary dimensions shall be enclosed in parentheses, and shall not be toleranced (see Figures 8.17and 8.18).Auxiliary dimensions relating to position shall be based on the dimensions which define the true theoreticalpositions of the features concerned. Where they relate to size, they shall normally be based on the mean sizesof the features concerned. In other cases, the basis of calculation shall be clearly stated on the drawing.Auxiliary dimensions shall not govern acceptance or rejection of the product.An auxiliary dimension is sometimes called a reference dimension.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 107: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

105 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.15 TABULAR PRESENTATION OF DIMENSIONS OF A COMPONENT

8.2.6 Methods of dimensioning common features Many of the methods of dimensioning featuresdescribed in this Clause are equally applicable to dimensioning of features other than those shown.8.2.6.1 Diameters Criteria for presentation of diameters are as follows:(a) Symbol A dimension indicating the diameter of a circle, cylinder, or spherical surface shall be preceded

by the symbol ∅ , separated by a space (see Figure 8.19).(b) Arrangement Dimensions of diameter shall be placed on the most appropriate view to ensure clarity, as

for instance on a longitudinal view in preference to an end view consisting of a number of concentriccircles (see Figure 8.20).

(c) Method of dimensioning Circles representing circular features in end view shall be dimensioned by oneof the methods shown in Figure 8.19.The diameter of circular features in longitudinal view shall be dimensioned by one of the methods shownin Figures 8.20, 8.21, and 8.23.

(d) Restricted space Where space is restricted, one of the methods shown in Figure 8.22 may be used.(e) Spherical surfaces The diameter of a spherical surface shall be dimensioned using the symbol S∅ (see

Figure 8.23).

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 108: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 106

PARTNO

millimetres

A B C D E

123456

101010101212

202020202525

303530354050

151512122020

424740455565

FIGURE 8.16 TABULAR PRESENTATION OF DIMENSIONS OF SIMILAR COMPONENTS

FIGURE 8.17 OVERALL LENGTH ADDED AS AN AUXILIARY DIMENSION

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 109: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

107 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.19 PLACEMENT OF DIAMETER DIMENSIONS IN END VIEW

8.2.6.2 Radii Criteria for the presentation of radii are as follows:(a) Symbol A dimension indicating the radius of part of a circle, cylinder or spherical surface shall be

preceded by the symbol R, separated by a small space.(b) Arrangement Radii shall be dimensioned by a dimension line which passes through, or is in line with, the

centre of the arc. The dimension line shall have one arrowhead only, that touching the arc. Radii of arcswhich need not have their centres located shall be dimensioned by one of the methods shown inFigure 8.24.

(c) Locating inconveniently placed centres Where the centre of an arc cannot conveniently be shown in itscorrect position, and yet needs to be located, one of the methods shown in Figure 8.25 shall be used. Theportion of the dimension line which touches the arc shall be normal to the arc.

(d) Radius of a spherical surface The radius of a spherical surface shall be dimensioned using the symbolSR. Examples are shown in Figure 8.26.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 110: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 108

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 111: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

109 AS 1100.101—1992

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 112: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 110

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 113: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

111 AS 1100.101—1992

8.2.6.3 Squares A dimension indicating the size of a square should be preceded by the symbol , separatedby a single space, as shown in Figure 8.27.

FIGURE 8.27 SQUARE SECTION

8.2.6.4 Holes Criteria for the presentation of holes are as follows:(a) Form or shape Form or shape should be defined by an appropriate symbol, e.g. ∅ or .

NOTE: The word ‘hole’ or ‘holes’ may be used for clarity.

(b) Sizes The depth of a hole refers to the depth of the full form hole. Holes with unspecified depths shall beconstrued as through holes (see Figure 8.28). The depth of a hole may be preceded by the depthsymbol .

FIGURE 8.28 HOLES

(c) Location The location of holes may be defined by specifying the diameter of pitch circles as shown inFigure 8.29 or by specifying the rectangular coordinates or centre distances as shown in Figure 8.30.Holes which are drawn with a common axis as shown in Figure 8.28(d) imply a requirement ofconcentricity (see Clause 8.10.4). Holes which are drawn with a common centre-line as shown inFigure 8.30(a) imply a requirement of symmetry (see Clause 8.10.5).

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 114: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 112

FIGURE 8.29 POSITIONING OF HOLES BY ANGULAR DIMENSIONING ON A PITCH CIRCLE

8.2.6.5 Equal dimensions When a dimension is divided into several parts the preferred method is shown inFigure 8.31(a). The word ‘equal’ or symbol ‘=’ shall not be used to indicate those dimensions which arenominally equal (see Figure 8.31(b)).8.2.6.6 Positioning of curved surfaces Circumferential dimensioning of the spacing of features on a curvedsurface shall be indicated by a curved dimension line as shown in Figure 8.32 with the arc symbol above thedimension. The curved dimension line shall be drawn relative to the curved surface as in Figure 8.32(a). It maybe desirable in certain cases to indicate the surface on which the dimension is to be taken by dots as shownin Figure 8.32.Chordal dimensioning of the spacing of features on a curved surface shall be indicated as shown inFigure 8.32(c).8.2.6.7 Chamfers Chamfers shall be dimensioned by one of the methods shown in Figure 8.33. However,chamfers of 45° should be dimensioned by one of the methods shown in Figure 8.33(b). Small 45° chamfersmay be dimensioned as shown in Figure 8.33(c).8.2.6.8 Countersinks, counterbores, spotfaces and depth Countersinks, counterbores, spotfaces, and depthshall be dimensioned in accordance with the examples given in Figure 8.34.8.2.6.9 Screw threads Criteria for the presentation of screw threads are as follows:(a) Designation Screw threads shall be specified by using the designation shown in the appropriate Standard,

e.g.M6 x 1-6g

When specifying special screw threads, the limits of which need to be shown, the dimensions for themajor, pitch, and minor diameters shall be given as in Figure 8.35.

(b) Undercuts Undercuts, where required, should be dimensioned on the drawing in accordance withAS B199.

(c) Length of thread The length of full thread or the distance to the end of full thread shall be specified usingone of the methods shown in Figures 8.36 to 8.39.Where it is necessary to limit the length of full threads and runouts, the method shown in Figures 8.38and 8.39(c) shall be used.

NOTES:

1 The end of a full thread is the point at which the thread profile ceases to be fully formed.

2 Methods of indicating incomplete threads are shown in Figures 8.36, 8.37, 8.38, and 8.39(c) and (d). Two methods are shown,Type B lines at 30° to the axis in all but Figures 8.39(c) in which the extent of the incomplete threads is shown by a note.

(d) Threaded holes Threaded holes shall be dimensioned by one of the methods shown in Figure 8.39. Holeswith unspecified depths shall be construed as threaded right through. (See Figure 8.39(b).)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 115: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

113 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.30 POSITIONING OF HOLES BY COORDINATES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 116: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 114

FIGURE 8.32 CURVED SURFACES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 117: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

115 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.33 CHAMFERS

8.2.6.10 Tapers Tapers should be dimensioned by either of the following methods:(a) By indicating the design taper or angle and one diameter or width positioned relative to some datum

surface (see Figure 8.40(a)).(b) By specifying two diameters or widths positioned relative to a single datum surface (see Figure 8.40(b)).The taper shall be expressed as a ratio, e.g.

0.2:1 1:10 3:100NOTES:

1 Taper is the change in diameter or width per unit axial length.

2 There is also a further method of dimensioningtapers known as the three-toleranced dimension method, which is not recommended.For further information, see Clause 8.3.13.5.

8.2.6.11 Profiles and curved surfaces A curved line composed of circular arcs should be dimensioned by radiias in Figure 8.41. Coordinates, as in Figure 8.42, should be used only if the preferred method is impracticable.Where the coordinate method is used, the coordinates shall be close enough to ensure that the designrequirement is satisfied. The coordinates may be rectangular or polar, and, where convenient, may be givenin tabular form. When dimensioning cam profiles, it is often convenient to give the dimensions in associationwith a replica of the follower (see Figure 8.43).8.2.6.12 Taper and slope symbols Symbols used for specifying taper and slope for conical and flat tapersare shown in Figures 8.16 and 8.44.These symbols are always shown to conform to the ISO method.8.2.7 Notes on drawings Notes may be classified as general or local as follows:(a) General notes General notes may be used with advantage to specify requirements which would otherwise

need to be repeated many times on a particular drawing. It is recommended that such notes be groupedtogether. A typical example is—CASTING RADII ARE 5 mm UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED

(b) Local notes Local notes refer to local requirements and should be placed near the point to which theyrefer. Figure 8.8 shows a typical example of a local note.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 118: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 116

FIGURE 8.34 COUNTERSINKS, COUNTERBORES, SPOTFACES AND DEPTH

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 119: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

117 AS 1100.101—1992

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 120: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 118

FIGURE 8.39 DIMENSIONING OF THREADED HOLES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 121: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

119 AS 1100.101—1992

8.3 GENERAL TOLERANCES AND RELATED PRINCIPLES8.3.1 General This Clause establishes terminology and practices for expressing tolerances on linear andangular dimensions, material condition modifiers and their application, and interpretations governing limits andtolerances.8.3.2 Terminology8.3.2.1 Axis (of a feature) — the locus of the median points of all cross-sections of the considered feature.8.3.2.2 Basic dimension A theoretically exact dimension defining a positional or angular relationship betweentwo or more features, or the form of a surface or profile. This dimension is shown in a box. (See Figure 8.45.)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 122: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 120

8.3.2.3 Datum—a perfect geometric element, such as a point or a line or a plane which alone or incombination with others of its kind defines precisely the basic shape of the geometric reference frame for aparticular group of features. See Figures 8.46 and 8.47. Appendix H provides further information on datums.

NOTE: The plural in this context is ‘datums’ not ‘data’.

8.3.2.4 Datum dimension—a basic dimension establishing true position of a datum or a datum target. (SeeFigure 8.48.)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 123: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

121 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.46 DATUM, DATUM FEATURE, AND SIMULATED DATUM—EXAMPLE 1

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 124: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 122

FIGURE 8.48 DATUM DIMENSION (SHOWN IN BOX)

8.3.2.5 Datum feature—a real feature of an item (such as a surface, a hole) which is used to establish thelocation of a datum. (See Figures 8.46 and 8.47.)

NOTE: Datum features are subject to manufacturing errors and variations and should be assigned tolerances appropriate to theirdesign functions.

8.3.2.6 Datum, simulated—a feature or features of equipment such as a surface plate, Australian heightdatum, construction datum or survey bench mark or from which the corresponding datum point, line or planeis derived. (See Figures 8.46 and 8.47.)8.3.2.7 Datum target—a specific point, line or area on the item used to establish a datum.8.3.2.8 Feature—an individual characteristic such as a flat surface, a cylindrical surface, two parallel surfaces,shoulder, screw thread, slot, profile, window, culvert, building, property boundary, road, river or railway.8.3.2.9 Group (of features)—two or more features which are functionally related.8.3.2.10 Size—term denoting magnitude of any kind.8.3.2.11 Size, actual—the size determined from a number of local sizes of a dimension of an individualfeature.8.3.2.12 Size, least material—(a) For an external feature—the minimum limit of size specified on the drawing.(b) For an internal feature—the maximum limit of size specified on the drawing.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 125: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

123 AS 1100.101—1992

8.3.2.13 Size, limits of—the maximum and minimum sizes permitted for a dimension (see Figure 8.50,Method A).

NOTE: The difference between the limits of size is equal to the tolerance.

8.3.2.14 Size, local—any individual measurement of the dimension of a feature. (See Figure 8.49.)

FIGURE 8.49 LOCAL SIZE

8.3.2.15 Size, mating(a) For an external feature—the dimension of the smallest similar perfect feature which can be circumscribed

about the feature so that it just contacts the surface at the highest points.(b) For an internal feature—the dimension of the largest similar perfect feature which can be inscribed within

the feature so that it just contacts the surface at the highest points.NOTE: Mating size only refers to spherical, cylindrical, and plane parallel features. See Figure 8.85.

8.3.2.16 Size, maximum material—(a) For an external feature—the maximum limit of size specified on the drawing (see Figure 8.85).(b) For an internal feature—the minimum limit of size specified on the drawing.8.3.2.17 Size, nominal—the size by which an item is designated as a matter of convenience.Examples: M20 screw thread; 75 mm × 50 mm timber wall plates.8.3.2.18 Tolerance—see Clause 8.1.1.2.8.3.2.19 Tolerance, bilateral—a tolerance in which variation is permitted only in both directions from thespecified dimension. (See Figure 8.53, Method C.)8.3.2.20 Tolerance, unilateral—a tolerance in which variation is permitted only in one direction from thespecified dimension. (See Figure 8.53, Method B.)8.3.2.21 Tolerance zone—a zone within which the surface or median plane of axis of a feature is to becontained.8.3.3 Application of tolerancing symbols8.3.3.1 General This Clause establishes the symbols for specifying geometric characteristics and otherdimensional requirements on engineering drawings.8.3.3.2 Symbol construction Information related to the construction, form, and proportion of individual symbolsdescribed herein is contained in Clause 4.3.8.3.3.3 Feature symbols The use of feature symbols is as follows:(a) Feature identification The feature identification symbol consisting of the rectangular frame symbol

containing the feature identification letter is used to identify a feature as shown in Figure 8.50(a).(b) Datum feature identification Consists of the datum feature symbol located on the datum feature and joined

to a feature identification symbol containing the datum identification letter (see Figure 8.50(b)).NOTE: The datum identification symbol may be unfilled.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 126: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 124

8.3.3.4 Datum identifying letters Letters of the alphabet (except I, O, E, P, R, S, M, and Q) are used asdatum identifying letters. Each datum feature requiring identification shall be assigned a different letter. Wheredatum features requiring identification on a drawing are so numerous as to exhaust the single alpha series,the double alpha series shall be used — AA through AZ, BA through BZ, etc.It is recognized that feature letters should not be duplicated for other purposes on the drawing.8.3.3.5 Datum target symbol The datum target symbol is a circle divided horizontally into two halves (seeFigure 8.51). The lower half contains a letter identifying the associated datum, followed by the target numberassigned sequentially starting with 1 for each datum. Where the datum target is an area, the area size maybe entered in the upper half of the symbol; otherwise, the upper half is left blank. A radial line attached to thesymbol is directed to a target point (indicated by an ‘X’), target line, or target area, as applicable (seeFigures 8.115, 8.116, and 8.117).8.3.3.6 Basic dimension symbol The feature identification symbol is used to identify a basic dimension asshown in Figure 8.45.8.3.3.7 Maximum material condition symbol The symbol is used to indicate ‘at maximum materialcondition’ as shown in Figure 8.84. The use of this symbol in local and general notes is prohibited.8.3.3.8 Projected tolerance zone symbol The symbol is used to indicate a projected tolerance zone asshown in Figure 8.94. The use of this symbol in local and general notes is prohibited.8.3.3.9 Dimension datum symbol The datum identification symbol is used to indicate the origin of a dimensionbetween two features (see Figure 8.52).8.3.3.10 Envelope symbol The symbol is used to indicate the application of the envelope principle asshown in Figure 8.58. The use of this symbol in local and general notes is prohibited.

FIGURE 8.52 DIMENSION DATUM SYMBOL

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 127: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

125 AS 1100.101—1992

8.3.4 Principle of independency This fundamental tolerancing principle states that each requirementspecified on a drawing, such as a dimensional tolerance or a geometrical tolerance, shall be metindependently without reference to any other dimension, tolerance, or characteristic unless a particularrelationship is specified by a separate indication.Following the ‘principle of independency’—(a) a toleranced size on a feature controls the size of the feature but not its form; and(b) a toleranced size between features controls the position between the features but not the form of either

feature.8.3.5 Envelope principle When applied to a feature this principle requires that if that feature is finishedeverywhere at its maximum material limit of size, it must be perfect in form over a specified length of thatfeature, where appropriate. It is indicated by the symbol following the dimension, as shown in Figure 8.58.8.3.6 Maximum material principle The maximum material principle is a tolerancing principle which takesinto account, where indicated in appropriate cases, the mutual dependence of tolerances of size, location, andorientation, and permits additional tolerance as the considered feature of a particular part departs from itsmaximum material condition. It shall be specified on the drawing by the symbol following the dimensionas shown in Figure 8.86(A).8.3.7 Tolerance indication methods Tolerances may be expressed as follows:(a) By specific limits of size or by limits of tolerance applied directly to the dimension.(b) By referencing the appropriate national or other Standards or specifications.(c) Indirectly by association with a geometry tolerance.(d) In a general tolerance note referring to those dimensions and geometry requirements on a drawing for

which tolerances are not otherwise specified.NOTE: Tolerances are not applicable to basic dimensions shown in a rectangular frame on the drawings.

8.3.8 Direct tolerancing methods8.3.8.1 Linear dimensions of features The tolerance of a linear dimension of a feature shall be expressedby one of the methods shown in Figure 8.53. There is no difference in the interpretation of these methods ofexpression, each of which does no more than define the maximum and minimum limits of size.When using Method A (see Figure 8.53), the larger limit of size shall be placed above the lower limit of size,and both dimensions shall be given to the same number of decimal places.When using Method B and one of the limits of tolerance is zero, this limit shall be expressed by the figure ‘0’and shall not be preceded by + or −.When using Method B or Method C, the dimensions shall be expressed as in Clause 8.2.4.1.

NOTE: The following method is sometimes found convenient in design offices but is not recommended for use on drawings issuedfor purposes of manufacture:

For shafts: 40 e7 or 40 e7 (-0.05 )(-0.075)

For holes: 40 H8 or 40 H8 (-0.039)( 0 )

The relevant symbols and limits are taken from AS 1654.

Where it is necessary to specify only one limit of size of a dimension (e.g. the minimum length of full threador the maximum radius that is permitted in a corner), the abbreviation ‘MAX’ or ‘MIN’ shall be used, e.g.

20 MIN LENGTH FULL THREADR 0.5 MAX

8.3.8.2 Angular dimensions The tolerances for angular dimensions limit the general direction of lines andsurfaces. Such tolerances do not limit form deviations of the features forming the angles. The angle betweentwo surfaces shall be defined as the angle between planes representing each surface. The direction of eachplane is defined as the direction of the two parallel planes enclosing a surface, these two parallel planes beingthe minimum distance apart. A similar definition applies to the angle between two lines. (See also Appendix F.)Tolerancing of angular dimensions shall be expressed in a similar way to tolerancing of linear dimensions (seeFigure 8.54).

NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, where a general tolerance note on the drawing includes angular tolerances, it applies to featuresshown at specified angles and at implied angles, e.g. 90°.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 128: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 126

FIGURE 8.53 TOLERANCING OF LINEAR DIMENSIONS

8.3.8.3 General tolerance notes Examples of tolerancing by general notes or reference to national and otherStandards are shown in Figure 8.55.

NOTE: For guidance on general tolerances of machined components, see AS 1100.201.

8.3.9 Interpretation of limits of dimensions8.3.9.1 Dimensional limits For the purpose of determining conformance within limits, the measured value iscompared directly with the specified value and any deviation outside the specified limiting value signifiesnon-conformance with the limits. Regardless of the number of decimal places, dimensional limits are to beinterpreted as if they were continued with zeros.Examples:

12.2 means 2.20 . . .012.0 12.00 . . .012.01 means 12.010 . . .012.00 12.000 . . .0

8.3.9.2 Plated or coated parts Where a part is to be plated or coated, the drawing or referenced documentshall specify whether the dimensions are before or after plating. Typical examples of notes are as follows:(a) DIMENSIONAL LIMITS APPLY AFTER PLATING.(b) DIMENSIONAL LIMITS APPLY BEFORE PLATING.(For coatings other than plating, substitute the appropriate term.)8.3.9.3 Interpretation of toleranced linear dimensions The interpretations of the toleranced linear dimensionson the thin rectangular plate shown in Figure 8.56(a) are as follows:(a) Length and width dimensions of the plate Following the interpretation of size dimensions (see

Clause 8.3.3) and using a two point method of measurement, the distance between the vertical sides ofthe plate is to be in the range 495 to 505. The tolerance for this dimension is obtained from the generaltolerance note, i.e. 500 − 5 = 495 and 500 + 5 = 505. The distance between the horizontal sides of theplate is determined likewise and it is to be in the range 249 to 250. These dimensions are illustrated inFigure 8.56(b).Note that these two dimensions imply no control of form (flatness) or orientation (squareness, parallelism)of the sides of the plate. However, the general angle tolerance note requires the angles between the sidesof the plate to be within the range 89° to 91°. An example of the angle tolerance applied to two of the foursides of the plate are shown in Figure 8.56(b).

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 129: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

127 AS 1100.101—1992

Tolerance except whereotherwise stated:Linear ±0.2Angular ±1°Flatness andstraightness ±0.2Runout 0.2

Tolerances on dimensions(except where otherwisestated):Up to 6 ±0.1Over 6 up to 30 ±0.2Over 30 up to 120 ±0.3Over 120 up to 315 ±0.5All angles ±1°

(a) (b)

All screw threads toAS 1275 Tolerance on casting thickness

±1%

(c) (d)

FIGURE 8.55 EXAMPLES OF GENERAL TOLERANCE NOTES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 130: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 128

(b) Size and position of the hole in the plate Following the interpretation of size dimensions (seeClause 8.3.3), the diameter of the hole is to be in the range 50 to 51 at all two point measurements aroundthe hole as shown in Figure 8.56(c).There is no form specification on the shape of the hole, e.g. circularity, cylindricity.The centre of the hole is given by the axis of the largest cylinder that will fit into the actual hole (seeParagraph (c)). The position of the hole is the shortest distance between the left vertical side and lowerhorizontal side of the plate and the axis of this cylinder. These dimensions are to be in the ranges 99to 101 and 120 to 130 as shown in Figure 8.56(d).Note that each of the above dimensions apply independently of all the other dimensions on the drawing.

(c) Positioning the axis of a datum and non-datum cylindrical feature The axis of a cylindrical feature is theaxis of the largest inscribed cylinder of a hole or the smallest circumscribed cylinder of a shaft. It is locatedso that any possible movement of the cylinder in any direction is equalized. This is illustrated inFigure 8.57 for a hole.

The interpretation applies to both datum and non-datum cylindrical features.8.3.10 Envelope principle (see Clause 8.3.5) With the envelope condition the maximum material limit ofsize (i.e. the high limit of size of an external feature or the low limits of size of an internal feature) defines alimit of perfect form for the relevant surfaces. In other words, if a feature is everywhere on its maximummaterial limits of size, it must be perfect in form. If the feature is not on its maximum material size, errors ofform are permitted, provided that no part of the finished surface crosses the maximum material limit of formand the feature is in accordance with its specified limits of size.This principle corresponds to the ideal control exercised by correctly designed full form gauges.In the interest of using standardized gauge blanks, it shall be assumed that, unless otherwise stated, thelength over which the above interpretation applies (L) is given by the following equation:

L = 33.2(1.145 − e−0.04D)where D is the maximum material size of the feature. For information on gauge blank sizes, see AS B129.Figure 8.58 shows typical extreme errors of form which could be permitted without contravening the aboveprinciple.8.3.11 Tolerances between features8.3.11.1 General Tolerances on dimensions that position features may be applied to those dimensions bythe position tolerancing method described in Section 8.10, or directly as follows.8.3.11.2 Dimensional limits related to a datum In certain cases it is necessary to indicate that a dimensionbetween two features shall originate from one of these features and not the other. Such a case is illustratedin Figure 8.59, where a part having two parallel surfaces of unequal length is to be mounted on the shortersurface. In this example, the datum identification symbol described in Clause 8.3.3.10 signifies that thedimension originates from the shorter surface and dimensional limits apply to the other surface. Without suchindication either surface can be selected as the datum.8.3.11.3 Interpretation of toleranced centre distances Limits of centre distances may be expressed by oneof the methods shown in Clause 8.3.8.1.The interpretation of toleranced centre distances in Figure 8.60(a) is shown in Figure 8.60(b). Each of thethree position requirements indicated in Figure 8.60(b) shall be satisfied independently. For example, the axisof the left-hand hole must lie within the tolerance zone shown in Figure 8.60(b)(i) and independently withinthat shown in Figure 8.60(b)(ii). Except where otherwise indicated, the limits of centre distances shall beobserved regardless of the actual finished sizes of the features concerned. Refer to Appendix H for locationof axis of holes.8.3.11.4 Application In cases where toleranced centre distances are used and the functional requirement isfor—(a) control of pitch of adjacent holes, then chain dimensions as shown in Figure 8.61(a) shall be used; or(b) control of position of each hole relative to a datum surface, then progressive dimensions as shown in

Figure 8.61(b) shall be used.Toleranced centre distances are suitable for defining the distance between two features, e.g. for the positionof a hole relative to a flat surface or the distance between a pair of holes, particularly where the magnitudeof the tolerance is different in two directions. Typical applications of toleranced centre distances are shownin Figure 8.62.

NOTES:

1 It should be noted that toleranced centre distances are normally checked individually, i.e. from feature to feature. Therefore, wherethere are more than two features which need to be related together in a group, the use of position tolerances should be consideredbecause they avoid accumulation of tolerances and enable the requirements to be specified more precisely. (See Appendix G.)

2 Where only arrowheads are used, as in Figure 8.61, there is no preferred datum for the dimension and it should be measured pointto point.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 131: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

129 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.56 INTERPRETATION OF LINEAR DIMENSIONS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 132: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 130

FIGURE 8.57 POSITIONING THE AXIS OF A CYLINDRICAL FEATURE

8.3.12 Angular surfaces—Tolerancing and interpretation8.3.12.1 General An angular surface may be located by a combination of linear dimensions and an angleor by linear dimensions alone. Each arrangement of dimensions and tolerances has the effect of specifyinga particular tolerance zone within which the surface must lie. The shape and extent of the zone thus specifieddepends on the dimensioning method chosen, and on the way tolerances are arranged around the locatingdimensions.8.3.12.2 Cumulative angular tolerancing If an angular surface is located by a combination of linear andangular dimensions, both of which are toleranced as in Figure 8.63(a), each dimensional requirement shallbe satisfied separately. In this example —(a) any point on the top surface must lie between 9.8 mm and 10.0 mm above the horizontal datum face as

in Figure 8.63(b)(i);(b) the angular surface must intersect the horizontal datum face along a line, the points of which are between

27.8 mm and 28.0 mm from the right-hand datum face, as in Figure 8.63(b)(ii); and(c) the angle (dihedral angle) between the angular surface and the horizontal face must lie between 109°30’

and 110° as in Figure 8.63(b)(iii).8.3.12.3 Basic angular tolerancing The basic angle tolerance method is illustrated in Figures 8.64(a) and8.65. No specific tolerance is placed on the angle which is indicated as basic. This means that the actualvariation permitted to the angle is defined by the tolerance on the

0associated linear dimension, viz.28-0.2 (in Figure 8.64(a)). This toleranced dimension together with the angledefine a tolerance zone within parallel boundaries as shown in Figure 8.63(b) and no part of the actual surfaceshall exceed these boundaries.8.3.13 Tapers

NOTE: This Clause applies not only to cones but also to all tapered features.

8.3.13.1 Methods of specifying tapers The following methods of specifying the required accuracy of taperedfeatures are recommended:(a) Basic taper (or basic angle) method — where the accuracy of taper is controlled solely by a tolerance of

size and where perfect form is required at MMC.NOTE: The envelope principle is embodied in a basic taper specification. Hence the symbol is not required.

(b) Toleranced taper (or angle) method — where the angle or taper is directly toleranced independently of thetolerance of size.

(c) Fitting to gauge or mating part.There is also one further method known as the ‘three toleranced dimensions method’. This is detailed inClause 8.3.13.5.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 133: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

131 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.58 (in part) EXAMPLES OF EXTREME ERRORS OF FORM ALLOWED

BY DIMENSIONAL LIMITS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 134: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 132

FIGURE 8.58 (in part) EXAMPLES OF EXTREME ERRORS OF FORM ALLOWED

BY DIMENSIONAL LIMITS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 135: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

133 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.59 RELATING DIMENSIONAL LIMITS TO A DATUM

8.3.13.2 Basic taper (or basic angle) method The term ‘basic taper’ (or ‘basic angle’) means that thetolerance specified for the size of the feature applies at all cross-sectional planes throughout its length andso limits errors of size. Basic angle (or basic taper) is indicated as shown in Figure 8.65(a).Figure 8.65(a) shows a tapered feature dimensioned by a basic angle and with its size specified by atoleranced dimension at one end. The tolerance diagram in Figure 8.65(b) illustrates how the tolerance of 0.05applies at all cross-sectional planes throughout the length of the tapered feature.Figure 8.66(a) shows a tapered feature dimensioned by a basic taper and with its size specified by atoleranced dimension at a plane located by a datum dimension. The tolerance diagram in Figure 8.66(b)illustrates how the tolerance of 0.05 applies to all cross-sectional planes throughout the length of the taperedfeature.Figure 8.67(a) illustrates the use of a basic taper in conjunction with a datum dimension which defines across-sectional plane which must be located within specified limits in relation to the left end of the piece.Figure 8.67(b) gives the tolerance diagram that results from the application of the 0.01 tolerance to the locationof all cross-sectional planes throughout the length of the tapered feature.The tolerance diagrams Figure 8.66(b) and Figure 8.67(b) show that the nature of the control of size, form andlocation is the same whenever a basic taper (or angle) is specified.Where the method of dimensioning shown in Figure 8.66(a) or Figure 8.67(a) is used, either the diameter orthe distance must be a datum dimension. If both were directly toleranced, the tolerances would be cumulativein their effect on the location of the tapered surface in relation to the end of the datum face.

NOTE: For simplicity, the interpretation in all figures shows the least material envelope symmetrically disposed with respect to themaximum material envelope. In practice, this will not be far from the truth, although there is, in fact, no least material limit of perfectform.

Any error of form may be present within the maximum material envelope, provided that the taper is everywhere within its least materiallimits of size at all sections (see Figure 8.68).

8.3.13.3 Toleranced taper (or angle) method In the tolerance taper method, a tolerance is applied directlyto the taper (or the included angle) independently of the tolerance which is specified for the size of the feature(see Figures 8.69 and 8.71). Therefore, the tolerance of size applies only at the plane at which the dimensionis shown on the drawing and NOT at every cross-sectional plane as is the case with the basic taper method.This method is used where the allowable variation of taper (or angle) is very much more restrictive than theallowable variation in size. The tolerance on taper shall be applied to the numerator of the ratio.In this method, the tolerancing of size shall be expressed as either a tolerance on diameter (or width) at adatum reference plane, which may be within or external to the component (see Figure 8.69(a)), or as a datumdiameter (or width) at a toleranced distance from some reference plane (see Figure 8.70(a)).The criteria for acceptance is that each dimensional requirement is satisfied independently, i.e. when usinga toleranced diameter as shown in Figure 8.69(a), the diameter, ∅ X (or width) at the specified reference planeshall be within the limits of size as shown in Figure 8.69(b)(ii) and the angle between the generator and theaxis shall be within the limits of size as shown in Figure 8.69(b)(i).Using a toleranced length, instead of a toleranced diameter, a similar interpretation is shown in Figure 8.70(b).An alternative method applying to steep internal tapers is shown in Figure 8.71.

NOTE: With this method it may be necessary in special cases to specify a control on circularity errors at all sections of the cones(see Clause 8.11.4.4).

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 136: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 134

FIGURE 8.60 INTERPRETATION OF TOLERANCED CENTRE DISTANCES WITH

DATUM SYMBOL

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 137: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

135 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.62 DIMENSIONING POSITIONS BY TOLERANCED CENTRE DISTANCES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 138: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 136

FIGURE 8.63 CUMULATIVE ANGULAR TOLERANCING

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 139: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

137 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.66 BASIC TAPER (OR BASIC ANGLE) METHOD USING A DATUM LENGTH

AND TOLERANCED WIDTH

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 140: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 138

FIGURE 8.69 TOLERANCED TAPER METHOD — USING A DATUM LENGTH AND

TOLERANCED DIAMETER

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 141: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

139 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.71 TOLERANCED ANGLE METHOD — FOR STEEP INTERNAL TAPER

8.3.13.4 Fitting to gauge or mating part Where it is necessary to specify that a tapered surface must fit agauge, or another component, notes such as those shown in Figures 8.72 and 8.73 should be used.Whenever this method of specification is used, instruction as to the method of inspection should be includedto ensure that the functional requirements are met.8.3.13.5 Three toleranced dimensions method The method of dimensioning tapers shown in Figure 8.74 maybe adopted where the diameter at each end and the length are all toleranced.

NOTE: This method is not recommended for precision tapers since it introduces an accumulation of tolerances. It may be used forcastings, forgings, sheet metal work, and other non-functional tapers.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 142: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 140

FIGURE 8.74 DIMENSIONING TAPERS BY THREE TOLERANCED DIMENSIONS METHOD

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 143: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

141 AS 1100.101—1992

8.3.14 Radii with unlocated centres Radii with unlocated centres shall be toleranced by one of the methodsin Clause 8.3.8.1.The interpretation of toleranced radii, where both upper and lower limits of size are given as in Figure 8.75(a),is shown in Figure 8.75(b). Provided that the actual profile lies within the tolerance zone defined by the upperand lower limits of size, the profile is acceptable.Where only the low limit of size is given as in Figure 8.76(a), any profile is acceptable, provided that it doesnot become smaller than the radius specified in Figure 8.76(b).Where only the high limit of size is given as in Figure 8.76(a), any profile is acceptable, provided that it lieswithin the zone represented by R0 and R5 as shown in Figure 8.77(b).In any of the above cases, where it is essential that the radius represent a smooth transition from one pointto another, this shall be indicated by a note, such as ‘BLEND’ as shown in Figure 8.78(a). The interpretationof this requirement is shown in Figure 8.78(b) where the actual profile must be contained within the zonedefined by the upper and lower limits of size.

NOTE: If the form of the radius is critical, this should be specified by additional notes.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 144: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 142

FIGURE 8.79 TOLERANCE ZONES AND POINTS OF DISCONTINUITY

8.3.15 Profile and curved surfaces — tolerancing and interpretation The form of a profile shall betoleranced by one of the following methods:(a) Where the profile is specified by coordinates, cartesian or polar, including over a replica of a follower, basic

dimensions can be arranged to the abscissae or angle and toleranced dimensions to the ordinates or radiirespectively (see Figures 8.80 to 8.83).

(b) Assigning geometry tolerancing as specified in Clause 8.4.If the controlled profile includes a sharp corner, the corner represents a discontinuity of the tolerance boundaryand the boundary is considered to extend to the intersection of the boundary lines as shown in Figure 8.79.At such corners the tolerance zone will permit considerable rounding of the corner. If this is undesirable, thedrawing shall indicate the design requirement by specifying the maximum or minimum acceptable radius (orboth).

NOTE: One important difference between the two methods is that the geometry tolerancing method provides a uniform materialtolerance normal to the profile, whereas in the toleranced ordinate method, the material tolerance normal to the surface will vary withthe shape of the profile.

8.4 DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING AND RELATED PRINCIPLES — GEOMETRY8.4.1 General This Clause establishes the terminology and practices for expressing tolerances of form,orientation, and location in conjunction with the relevant dimensions of particular features. Such tolerances aretermed geometry tolerances.8.4.2 Terminology8.4.2.1 Datum group — a group of datums of an item which serves as a reference for the location of otherfeatures on the item. (See Figure 8.84.)8.4.2.2 Datum system — a system which consists of mating datum groups.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 145: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

143 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.81 TOLERANCED ORDINATES OVER FOLLOWER

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 146: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 144

FIGURE 8.83 TOLERANCED RADII OVER FOLLOWER

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 147: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

145 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.84 DATUM GROUP ESTABLISHED BY TWO FEATURES, A AND B

8.4.2.3 Geometric reference frame — a diagrammatic representation of the perfect geometric relationshipbetween perfect features, including datums, in a group.See Figure 8.86(b) which shows the geometric reference frame for group 2 of the component ofFigure 8.86(a).8.4.2.4 Least material condition — the state of the considered feature wherein it is everywhere at the leastmaterial size specified on the drawing.8.4.2.5 Maximum material condition — the state of the considered feature wherein it is everywhere at themaximum material size specified on the drawing. (See Figure 8.85.)8.4.2.6 Virtual condition(a) Of a feature — the limiting functional boundary permitted by the drawing data, which is generated by the

collective effect of the maximum material size of the considered feature and the specified geometrytolerances.

(b) Of a group of features — the assembly of the virtual condition of all the features comprising the group inperfect geometric relationship as defined by the drawing data.

8.4.2.7 Virtual size — the dimension defining the virtual condition of a feature. (See Figure 8.85.)8.4.2.8 Tolerance diagram — the geometric reference frame with the tolerance zones superimposed uponit. (See Figure 8.86(c).)8.4.2.9 Tolerance, form — the total amount of variation permitted for the form of a feature.8.4.2.10 Tolerance, geometry — the maximum permissible overall variations of form, location and orientationof a feature.8.4.2.11 Tolerance, position — the total amount of variation permitted for the location of a feature in the groupof which it is a member.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 148: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 146

FIGURE 8.85 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN VARIOUS SIZES AND CONDITIONS

8.4.3 Symbols8.4.3.1 General This Clause establishes the symbols for specifying geometry tolerances on engineeringdrawings.8.4.3.2 Symbol construction Information related to the construction, form, and proportions of individualsymbols described herein is contained in Clause 4.3.8.4.3.3 Geometric characteristic symbols The symbols denoting geometric characteristics are shown inTable 8.2.

TABLE 8.2SYMBOLS FOR GEOMETRIC CHARACTERISTICS

Application Type of tolerance Characteristic Symbol

For individual features Form Straightness

Flatness

Circularity (roundness)

Cylindricity

For individual or relatedfeatures

Profile Profile of a line

Profile of a surface

For related features Orientation Angularity

Perpendicularity

Perallelism

Location Position includingconcentricity and symmetry

Runout Circular runout

Total runout

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 149: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

147 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.86 LOCATION OF FEATURE PATTERNS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 150: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 148

8.4.4 Specification of geometry tolerances8.4.4.1 Methods of specification Geometry tolerances shall be specified on drawings using either thetolerance frame or tabular method.8.4.4.2 Geometry tolerance frame Geometric characteristic symbols, the tolerance value, and datumreference letters, where applicable, are combined using the tolerance frame method (see Figure 8.87) or thetabular method (see Figure 8.88) to express a geometric tolerance.Tolerance frame method is preferred when there are no more than three simple groups.Tabular method is preferred when the group or groups are complex or number three or more.Examples of display using the tabular presentation and the tolerance frame method are shown in Appendix B.8.4.4.3 Tolerance frame method An example of a tolerance frame is shown in Figure 8.87. Each toleranceframe shall be located so that it can be read from the bottom of the drawing and the details listed inClauses 8.4.4.3 to 8.4.4.5 should be given. (See also Appendix B.)Where it is necessary to identify groups in a drawing, they shall be identified by inserting a number in theleft-hand compartment as shown in Figure 8.87. Where it is not necessary to identify a feature with a group,the left-hand compartment shall be omitted. (See example in Figure 8.97.)

FIGURE 8.87 TOLERANCE FRAME DISPLAY

The feature controlled by the tolerance frame shall be indicated by one of the following methods:(a) A leader connecting it to either end of the tolerance frame. The leader shall terminate in an arrowhead at

the toleranced feature. (See Figure 8.89.)(b) (i) The feature identification symbol and letter shall be placed adjacent to the tolerance frame controlling

the feature as in Figure 8.108 or shown separate from the tolerance frame as in Figure 8.109.(ii) A leader connecting it to the feature identification symbol in which is inscribed an appropriate

identification letter. The leader shall terminate in an arrowhead at the toleranced feature. (SeeFigure 8.90).The arrowhead shall be positioned as follows:(A) On the outline of the feature or on an extension of the outline (but not at a dimension line) when

the tolerance refers to the line itself or to the surface represented by the line (seeFigure 8.89(a)).

(B) On a projection line at a dimension line when the tolerance refers only to the axis or medianplane of the feature so dimensioned (see Figures 8.89(b) and (c)).

(C) On the axis or median plane when the tolerance refers to the common axis or median plane ofall features on the axis or median plane (see Figures 8.89(d), (e), and (f)).

NOTE: Figure 8.89(b) and (d) show alternative methods of expressing the same requirement on a single feature part; however, formultiple feature parts there can be distinction as shown in Item C of Table 8.7.

8.4.4.4 Symbol Symbols indicating the characteristics to be toleranced shall conform to those in Figure 4.14and shall be inscribed in the appropriate compartment of the tolerance frame.8.4.4.5 Tolerance value The required tolerance value shall be inserted in the appropriate compartment ofthe frame subject to the following condition:(a) If the tolerance zone is neither circular nor cylindrical, its width lies in the direction of the arrow terminating

the leaders (see Table 8.14, Parallelism 1(a) and (b)).(b) If the tolerance zone is cylindrical, the tolerance value shall be preceded by the symbol ∅(c) If the tolerance is applied to a specified length, lying anywhere, the value of this length shall be added after

the tolerance value, and separated from it by an oblique stroke (see Figure 8.91).(d) For a surface, the indication in Figure 8.91 is used for a surface. This means that the tolerance applies

to all lines of the specified length in any position and any direction.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 151: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

149 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.89 INDICATION OF FEATURE CONTROLLED

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 152: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 150

(e) If, to the tolerance of the whole feature, another tolerance of the same type restricted to a specified lengthis added, the latter tolerance shall be indicated below the former as shown in Figure 8.92.

(f) If the tolerance is applied only to a specified portion within the feature, this portion shall be shown by aType J line and dimensioned as shown in Figure 8.93.

FIGURE 8.93 TOLERANCE OVER A SPECIFIED PORTION

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 153: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

151 AS 1100.101—1992

(g) If the tolerance is applied to a specified length projected beyond the feature, this length shall be shownby a Type J line and dimensioned, as illustrated in Figure 8.94 (see also Clause 8.10.10).

FIGURE 8.94 PROJECTED TOLERANCE ZONE INDICATION

(h) If the maximum material modifier is to be applied, then it shall be positioned in the frame as follows:(i) After the tolerance value if the principle of maximum material condition is to be applied to the

toleranced feature (see Figure 8.95(a)).(ii) After the letter identifying the datum if the principle of maximum material condition is to be applied

to the datum (see Figure 8.95(b)).(iii) After both the tolerance value and the letter identifying the datum if the principle of maximum material

condition is to be applied both to the toleranced feature and to the datum (see Figure 8.95(c)).Unless indicated by the symbol , a geometry tolerance applies regardless of feature size.

FIGURE 8.95 EXAMPLES OF THE USE OF

(i) Information relating to the number, dimension, and tolerance of a feature should be placed above itstolerance frame as in Figure 8.96.Notes relating to the feature should be inscribed below the tolerance frame.

FIGURE 8.96 INFORMATION ASSOCIATED WITH A TOLERANCE FRAME

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 154: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 152

(j) If, to the tolerance of the whole feature at MMC, another tolerance of the same type restricts thepermissible error at other than MMC, the latter tolerance shall be indicated below the former as shown inFigure 8.97.

FIGURE 8.97 RESTRICTED TOLERANCE AT OTHER THAN MMC

8.4.4.6 Datum feature The datum identification letter shall be inserted in the last compartment of thetolerance frame (see Figure 8.100(d)).Where a single datum is established by two features, a hyphen shall be placed between the letter designatingthe features (see Figure 8.109). Where a datum system is established by —(a) two features only, the two identifying letters of the datum features shall be inserted in the following order:

primary, secondary (see Figure 8.110); and(b) a group of features, the group number shall be used to identify the datum (see Figure 8.114).Where no datum is applicable as shown in Figure 8.98, or where a datum is the geometric reference framefor the group and is not related to any other feature, the right-hand compartment shall be omitted. SeeFigure 8.99. Alternatively, the datum feature may be indicated as shown in Figure 8.100.

FIGURE 8.98 DATUM NOT APPLICABLE

8.4.5 Tabular method8.4.5.1 General Examples of tabular presentations are shown in Figure 8.88. The table should be locatedin a prominent position on the drawing and the details listed in this Clause should be given.8.4.5.2 Group number Where it is necessary to identify groups in a drawing, they shall be identified byinserting a number in the first column of the table as shown in Figure 8.88. When it is not necessary to identifya feature with a group, a complete diagonal line shall be inserted in the first column as shown in Figure 8.101.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 155: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

153 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.100 INDICATION OF DATUMS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 156: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 154

8.4.5.3 Feature controlled The feature controlled by the tolerance shall be indicated by —(a) the method detailed in Clause 8.4.4.3(b)(i); and(b) the feature identification letter inscribed on the appropriate line in the second column of the table (see

Figure 8.88).8.4.5.4 Number of features The number of features corresponding to each identifying letter shall be enteredin the appropriate column of the table.8.4.5.5 Symbol Symbols indicating the characteristics to be toleranced shall conform to those in Figure 4.14,and shall be inscribed in the appropriate column of the table.8.4.5.6 Tolerance value The required tolerance value shall be inserted in the appropriate column of the tablewith the provisions detailed in Clause 8.4.4.4.Tolerances over a specified length should be indicated as shown in Figure 8.101.

FIGURE 8.101 TOLERANCE OVER A SPECIFIED LENGTH — TABULAR METHOD

8.4.5.7 Datum features The datum feature identification letter shall be inserted in the last column of the table(see Figure 8.88).The significance of the position of the datum symbol is the same as for the arrowhead detailed inClause 8.4.4.2 and Figure 8.89.Where a single datum is established by two features, a hyphen shall be placed between the letters designatingthe features (see Figure 8.88, Group 4).Where a datum system is established by two features only, the two identifying letters of the datum featuresare inserted in the following order: primary, secondary (see Figure 8.88, Group 5).Where a datum system is established by a group of features, the group number shall be used to identify thedatum (see Figure 8.88, Group 2).Where no datum is applicable as illustrated in Figure 8.98 or where a datum is the geometric reference framefor the group and is not related to any other feature as illustrated in Figure 8.102, a completed diagonal lineshall be inserted in the appropriate column of the table.8.4.5.8 Symbol The symbol shall be indicated as detailed in Clause 8.3.6.Where the principle of maximum material condition applies to all features or to all datums or to all features anddatums, the modifier may be placed in the appropriate headings of the table and omitted from the body of thetable (see Figure 8.103).

FIGURE 8.102 GEOMETRIC REFERENCE FRAME AS DATUM

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 157: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

155 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.103 MODIFIER APPLICABLE TO ALL FEATURES — TABULAR DISPLAY

8.5 INTERPRETATION OF MAXIMUM MATERIAL CONDITION Where a geometric tolerance is applied onan MMC basis, the specified tolerance is dependent on the size of the considered feature. The tolerance islimited to the specified value if the feature is produced at its MMC limit of size. Where the actual size of thefeature has departed from MMC, an increase in the tolerance is allowed equal to the amount of suchdeparture. The total permissible variation in the specific geometric characteristic is maximum when the featureis at least material condition. (See Figure 8.122 and Appendix E for application.)

NOTES:

1 Zero geometry tolerances can only be associated with the maximum material condition as to do otherwise would be to demandperfection.

2 Where a geometric tolerance is applied without reference to LMC or MMC the specified tolerance is independent of the size of theconsidered feature. The tolerance is limited to the specified value regardless of the actual size of the feature.

3 Since the maximum material principle involves a relationship between size and geometry form or position, it can only be applied tothose features where this relationship is possible. In effect this limits its application to features incorporating an axis or median plane.See Table 8.3.

8.6 DATUM SPECIFICATION AND INTERPRETATION8.6.1 General This Clause deals with the constituent parts of the geometric reference frame, which is usedto establish the true positions of all features which are to be regarded as members of the one group, includingall datum and non-datum features. It contains the criteria for selecting, designating, and using features of apart as grouped datum features in the geometrical reference frame, and establishes the origins of thedimensional relationships between non-datum and datum features. The group of datum features aloneestablishes a datum reference frame within the geometric reference frame.8.6.2 The function, designation, and interpretation of datums Datums are used for the following purposes:(a) To align certain features on two components in accurate geometric relation when assembled.(b) To locate mating components accurately to facilitate assembly.(c) To act as a convenient base from which to dimension features.Component features are referred to as datum features, such as datum holes, datum pins, datum surfaces,whereas the geometric counterparts with which they are associated are called datum axes, datum planes,datum points, or datum lines.Since measurements cannot be made from the geometric counterparts, the datum planes and axes of thegeometric reference frame are represented in practice by the precise surfaces and axes of the manufacturingand inspection equipment. Machine tables and surface plates are not true planes, nor do the spindles ofdividing heads rotate about precisely true axes, but they are usually of such high accuracy that they simulatedatum planes and axes adequately. Measurements are therefore made in practice from surfaces and axes inthe processing or measuring equipment. Such measurements do not take into account any variations of thedatum features from their true positions in the geometric reference frame.8.6.3 Datum reference frame Sufficient datum features are first chosen on the part from an analysis ofassembly and functional requirements, and these chosen features are then used to relate the part to the threemutually perpendicular planes which make up the datum reference frame. This reference frame exists in theoryonly and not on the part. Therefore it is necessary to establish a method for simulating the theoreticalreference frame from the actual features of the part. This simulation is accomplished by positioning the parton appropriate datum features to relate the part adequately to the reference frame and to restrict motion ofthe part in relation to it. (See Figures 8.104 and 8.105.)These planes are simulated in a mutually perpendicular relationship to provide direction as well as the originfor the positions of related non-datum features in the geometrical reference frame. Thus, when the part ispositioned on the datum reference frame (by physical contact between each datum feature and its counterpartin the associated processing equipment), dimensions of non-datum features which are related to the datumreference frame are thereby also mutually perpendicular. This theoretical reference frame constitutes thethree-plane dimensioning system used for datum referencing. (See Figure 8.106.)In some cases, e.g. for a single group of features, one datum reference frame will suffice. However, whereseveral groups of features are present, a corresponding number of datum reference frames will be necessaryat specific locations on the part. In such cases, each feature control frame must contain the datum feature ordatum group references that are applicable.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 158: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 156

TABLE 8.3APPLICATION OF MMC

Characteristic tolerance The MMC concept may be applied. If indicated below, to thefeature being toleranced, or the datum feature (or both)

according to the design requirement

Straightness

YES for the axis or median plane of afeature, the size of which is specified by atoleranced dimension, e.g. the axis of a holeor a shat of the median plane of a slot

NO for a planesurface or a line ona surface

Parallelism

Perpendicularity

Angularity

Position (includesconcentricity and symmetry

Flatness

No for all features

Circularity

Cylindricity

Profile of a line

Profile of a surface

Run-out

Total run-out

8.6.4 Datum features8.6.4.1 General Datum features are selected, singly or in groups, on the basis of function as explained inClause 8.6.1. Corresponding features are also selected on mating parts to establish datum systems for thetwo parts. Datum features must be readily discernible on each part. Therefore, for symmetrical parts or partswith identical features, physical identification of the datum features on the part may be necessary. A datumfeature should be accessible on the part and be of sufficient size to permit subsequent processing operations.8.6.4.2 Temporary and permanent datum features Selected datum features of castings, forgings, orweldments may be used temporarily for the establishment of machined surfaces which will serve subsequentlyas permanent datum features. Such temporary datum features may or may not be subsequently removed bymachining. Permanent datum features should be surfaces or diameters not appreciably changed bysubsequent machining operations.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 159: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

157 AS 1100.101—1992

8.6.4.3 Datum feature symbols Datum features are identified on the drawing by means of symbols. Thesesymbols relate to physical features and are not applied to centre-lines, centre planes, or axes.8.6.4.4 Datum feature control Measurements made from a datum plane do not take into account anyvariations of the datum surface from the datum plane. Consideration shall be given to the desired accuracyof datum features relative to design requirements and the degree of control necessary for the non-datumfeatures related to them. In general, datum features will need to be controlled by specifying appropriategeometry tolerances. Where control of the entire feature becomes impractical, use of datum targets may beconsidered. (See Clause 8.6.6.)

FIGURE 8.104 PART A LOCATED ON PART B BY THREE PLANE SURFACES

8.6.5 Examples of datums and datum groups Examples of datums and datum groups are as follows:(a) Single datum established by one feature The simplest datum consists of one feature such as a hole, a

pin, or a surface. In Figure 8.107(a), the axis of the bore Z at MMC is the datum for the concentricity ofthe external diameter Y. The geometric reference frame consists of a straight line corresponding to theaxes of both Z and Y which are coincident, and the MMC tolerance diagram which is the geometricreference frame with the tolerance zones added, is shown in Figure 8.107(b).In Figure 8.108(a), the surface X is datum for the position of the three holes W. The geometric referenceframe here consists of a datum plane, of width and length corresponding to surface X, and three linescorresponding to the axes of the three holes W situated at their correct positions relative to each other andto X. The MMC tolerance diagram is shown in Figure 8.108(b).Where no flatness tolerance is specified for the datum surface, the tolerance zone for the planeestablished by that surface is indicated in the tolerance diagram as being of zero width as shown inFigure 8.108(b).NOTES:

1 It should be realized that the actual surface will not be perfectly flat.

2 Screw threads, gears, and splines. Where a screw thread is specified as a datum reference, the datum axis is derived fromthe pitch cylinder, unless otherwise specified. Where a gear or spline is specified as a datum reference, a specific feature ofthe gear or spline must be designated to derive a datum axis. In general, these types of datum features should be avoided.

(b) Single datum established by two features Two features such as two coaxial holes or shafts may be usedto establish a single common datum axis as illustrated in Figure 8.109(a).Where no concentricity tolerance is specified for the two datum features, the tolerance zone for their axesare indicated in the tolerance diagram as being of zero diameter as shown in Figure 8.109(b).NOTES:

1 It should be realized that the actual axes will not be perfectly coaxial.

2 This method is applicable when the lengths of the datum features are short relative to their distance apart.

(c) Datum group established by two features Two features such as a hole and a surface, or a spigot and asurface may be selected to establish a datum group.In Figure 8.110(a), the datum features surface A and recess B form a single datum group. The featureswithin the datum group are toleranced for geometric relation in a similar way to non-datum features. Theinterpretation of Figure 8.110(a) is that surface A is the principal datum, and that the datum recess B hasa zero tolerance for squareness at MMC with respect to A.The shaft C is required to be square to A and concentric with B within the tolerance zone of ∅ 0.04when C and B are both at their maximum material condition as indicated in the geometry tolerance framein Figure 8.110(b).

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 160: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 158

FIGURE 8.106 RESULTING DATUM REFERENCE FRAME FOR PART A

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 161: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

159 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.107 SINGLE DATUM ESTABLISHED BY AN AXIS

In Figure 8.111(a), the flat surface K and the cylinder J form a datum group for the four holes L. Thegeometric reference frame consists of a datum plane corresponding to datum surface K, a datum axissquare to the datum plane corresponding to the axis of the datum cylinder J, and the four axes of theholes L in correct position relative to the datum plane and axis and to each other.The four holes L have position tolerances of ∅ 0.25 at MMC in relation to the datum group. The tolerancediagram for this group at MMC is indicated in Figure 8.111(b), where K is a primary datum with a flatnesstolerance of 0.05 width and J has a zero squareness tolerance at MMC with respect to K.

(d) Datum group established by three features Three features may be selected to form more complex datumgroups and they are then toleranced for geometry with respect to their true positions in a similar way tothe datum features of Figure 8.111(a). The true positions of the datum features are located relative to thethree mutually perpendicular planes or axes of the geometric reference frame. For example, the tolerancediagram for Group 2 in Figure 8.112 which includes the datum Group 1, is the geometric reference framewith the tolerance zones superimposed as shown in Figure 8.113.The datum surface A in Figure 8.112 must satisfy the specified tolerance for flatness, and the datumsurfaces B and C must also satisfy the specified tolerances for squareness. Since all three are grouped,their surfaces must simultaneously fall within the tolerance zones shown in Figure 8.113.The axes of the two holes D must be contained within cylinders 0.25 mm diameter; with their axes in thespecified true positions in relation to the datum planes A, B and C (see Figure 8.113).The three datum surfaces may be classified into primary, secondary, and tertiary, depending on theirrelative functional importance, which in turn determines the relative magnitude of the tolerances. InFigure 8.112 the datum group consists of the primary datum surface A, the secondary datum surface Band the tertiary datum surface C. The primary datum surface is indicated in the extreme right-hand columnof the tables and the order of importance of the other two surfaces may be inferred from the magnitudeof the squareness tolerances. The corresponding three planes of the geometric reference frame areindicated in Figure 8.113.A further example is indicated in Figure 8.114.

8.6.6 Datum targets8.6.6.1 General Datum targets are shown on the drawing by means of a datum target symbol (seeClause 8.3.3.5). They indicate specific points, lines, or areas of contact on a part that are used in establishinga datum reference frame. Because of inherent irregularities, the entire surface of some features cannot beeffectively used to establish a datum. Examples are non-planar or uneven surfaces produced by casting,forging, or moulding; surfaces of weldments; and thin section surfaces subject to bowing, warping, or otherinherent or induced distortions.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 162: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 160

FIGURE 8.108 SINGLE DATUM ESTABLISHED BY A SURFACE

8.6.6.2 Datum target points A datum target point is indicated by the symbol X, which is dimensionally locatedon a direct view of the surface. Where there is no direct view, the point location is dimensioned on twoadjacent views (see Figure 8.115).8.6.6.3 Datum target lines A datum target line is indicated by the symbol X on an edge view of the surface,a line type K on the direct view, or both (see Figure 8.116). Where the length of the datum target line mustbe controlled, its length and location are dimensioned.8.6.6.4 Datum target areas Where it is determined that an area or areas of flat contact is necessary to assureestablishment of the datum (that is, where spherical or pointed pins would be inadequate), a target area ofthe desired shape is specified. The boundary of the datum target area is drawn with a line type K and the areais cross-hatched as shown in Figure 8.117. Where it becomes impractical to delineate a circular target area,the method of indication shown in Figure 8.117(b) may be used.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 163: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

161 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.109 SINGLE DATUM ESTABLISHED BY TWO FEATURES

8.6.6.5 Datum target dimensions The location and size, where applicable, of datum targets are defined withappropriate dimensions as shown in Figure 8.118.In this example, three mutually perpendicular planes are established by three target points on the primarydatum feature, two on the secondary, and one on the tertiary.8.7 VIRTUAL CONDITION Depending upon its function, a feature is controlled by tolerances such as size,form, orientation, and location with or without MMC or envelope modifiers as applicable. Consideration shouldbe given to the collective effect of these factors in determining the clearance between mating parts and inestablishing gauge feature sizes. From such consideration, a net resultant boundary is derived, termed virtualcondition (see Clause 8.4.2.6 and Appendix E).8.8 SCREW THREADS — ORIENTATION AND LOCATION Each tolerance of orientation or location anddatum reference specified for a screw thread applies to the axis of the thread derived from the pitch cylinder.Where an exception to this practice is necessary, the specific feature of the screw thread (such as MINORDIA or MAJOR DIA) shall be stated above the feature control frame.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 164: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 162

FIGURE 8.110 DATUM GROUP ESTABLISHED BY TWO FEATURES — EXAMPLE 1

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 165: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

163 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.111 DATUM GROUP ESTABLISHED BY TWO FEATURES — EXAMPLE 2

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 166: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 164

FIGURE 8.112 DATUM GROUP ESTABLISHED BY THREE SURFACES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 167: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

165 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.113 MMC TOLERANCE DIAGRAM FOR GROUP 2 OF FIGURE 8.112

8.9 GEARS AND SPLINES — ORIENTATION AND LOCATION Each tolerance of orientation or locationand datum reference specified for gears and splines shall designate the specific feature of the gear or splineto which each applies (such as MAJOR DIA, PITCH DIA or MINOR DIA). This information is stated above thefeature control frame.8.10 TOLERANCES OF POSITION8.10.1 General Tolerances of position are used to control the following relationships:(a) Centre distance between such features as holes, slots, bosses and tabs.(b) Location of features (such as in Item (a)) as a group, from datum features such as plane and cylindrical

surfaces.(c) Concentricity or symmetry of features.(d) Features with centre distances equally disposed about a datum axis or plane.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 168: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 166

FIGURE 8.114 DATUM GROUP ESTABLISHED BY A SURFACE AND TWO HOLES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 169: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

167 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.116 DATUM TARGET LINE

8.10.2 Position tolerancing A position tolerance defines a zone within which the centre, axis, or medianplane of a feature of size is permitted to vary from true (theoretically exact) position. Basic dimensionsestablish the true position from specified datum features and between interrelated features. A positiontolerance is indicated by the position symbol, a tolerance, and appropriate datum references placed in afeature control frame.

8.10.3 Tolerances of position with true position dimension (see Table 8.4) A tolerance of position limitsthe deviation of the position of a feature from its specified true position. The tolerance zone is symmetricallylocated about the true position of a point, line or plane and may be the area within a circle or between twoparallel straight lines or the space within a cylinder or between two parallel planes. Where the tolerance zoneis the space within a cylinder or between two parallel planes, the axis of the cylinder or the two parallel planesshall be normal to the plane of projection.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 170: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 168

8.10.4 Tolerances of position applied to concentricity (see Table 8.5) A concentricity tolerance is aparticular case of a position tolerance in which the position of a feature is specified by its concentricityrelationship.

8.10.5 Tolerances of position applied to symmetry (see Table 8.6) A symmetry tolerance is a particularcase of a position tolerance in which the position of the feature is specified by its symmetrical relationship.

8.10.6 Material condition basis Position tolerancing may be applied on an MMC or regardless of featuresize basis. The symbol for MMC follows the specified tolerance and applicable datum reference in thetolerance frame when required (see Figure 8.123). Where no symbol for MMC is shown, the specified positiontolerance applies regardless of the size of the feature.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 171: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

169 AS 1100.101—1992

TABLE 8.4TOLERANCES OF POSITION

(continued)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 172: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 170

TABLE 8.4 (continued)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 173: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

171 AS 1100.101—1992

TABLE 8.5TOLERANCES OF POSITION APPLIED TO CONCENTRICITY

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 174: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 172

TABLE 8.6TOLERANCES OF SYMMETRY

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 175: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

173 AS 1100.101—1992

8.10.7 MMC as related to position tolerancing The position tolerance and maximum material condition ofmating features are considered in relation to each other. MMC by itself means a feature of a finished productcontains the maximum amount of material permitted by the toleranced size dimension for that feature. Thus,for holes, slots, and other internal features, maximum material is the condition where these features are attheir minimum allowable sizes. For shafts, as well as for bosses, lugs, tabs, and other external features,maximum material is the condition where these are at their maximum allowable sizes.A position tolerance applied at MMC may be explained in any of the following ways:(a) In terms of the surface of a hole Although the specified size limits of the hole shall be maintained, no

element of the hole surface shall be inside a theoretical boundary located at true position (seeFigure 8.119).

(b) In terms of the axis of a hole Where a hole is at MMC (minimum diameter), its axis must fall within acylindrical tolerance zone whose axis is located at true position. The diameter of this zone is equal to theposition tolerance (see Figure 8.120(a) and (b)). This tolerance zone also defines the limits of variationin the orientation of the axis of the hole in relation to the datum surface (see Figure 8.120(c)).

(c) It is only when the feature is at MMC that the specified position tolerance applies. Where the actual sizeof the feature is larger than MMC, additional position tolerance results (see Figure 8.121). This increaseof position tolerance is equal to the difference between the specified maximum material limit of size (MMC)and the actual size of the feature. The specified position tolerance for a feature may be exceeded wherethe actual size is larger than MMC and still satisfy functional and interchangeability requirements.

FIGURE 8.119 BOUNDARY FOR SURFACE OF HOLE AT MMC

In many instances, a group of features (such as a group of mounting holes) shall be positioned relative to adatum feature at MMC. See Figure 8.122. Where datum feature B is at MMC, its axis determines the positionof the pattern of features as a group. Where datum feature B departs from MMC, its axis may be displacedrelative to the position of the datum axis (datum B at MMC) in an amount equal to one-half the differencebetween its actual and MMC sizes.If a functional gauge is used to check the part, this shift of the axis of the datum feature is automaticallyaccommodated. However, if open set-up inspection methods are used to check the position of the featurepattern relative to the actual axis of the actual datum feature, this shall be taken into account.Since the actual datum feature must serve as the origin of measurements for the pattern of features, thefeatures are therefore viewed as if they, as a group, had been displaced relative to the axis of the (actual)datum feature. This relative shift of the pattern of features, as a group, with respect to the axis of the datumfeature does not affect the positional tolerances of the features relative to one another within the pattern.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 176: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 174

FIGURE 8.120 HOLE AXES IN RELATION TO POSITION TOLERANCE ZONES

8.10.8 Zero position tolerancing at MMC In the preceding explanation, a position tolerance of somemagnitude is specified for the position of features. Zero position tolerances may be specified (seeClause 8.11.10 for details).8.10.9 Location of feature patterns8.10.9.1 General Differing functional requirements for the location of feature patterns require differentmethods of assigning tolerances and of displaying these clearly on drawings. The features within the patternare normally located by position tolerances as shown in Figures 8.123 to 8.128 (inclusive) and the pattern itselfis usually located with respect to chosen external features either by toleranced centre distances as shown inFigures 8.123, 8.125, 8.127 and 8.128 or by position tolerances as shown in Figures 8.124 and 8.126.The general principle adopted in the examples is that where toleranced centre distances are used to locatea group of features, each centre distance requirement and each group positional requirement shall be satisfiedindependently (see Clause 8.3.4).The exclusive use of toleranced centre distances to locate all features in a pattern is not recommended dueto difficulties brought about by accumulation of tolerances.The following notes apply to Figures 8.123, 8.125, 8.127, and 8.128:(a) It should be noted that surfaces X and Y, although shown at right-angles, will not necessarily be precisely

so in practice.(b) Where locations of features are directly controlled by toleranced centre distances, the surfaces X and Y

in the tolerance diagrams shall be of sufficient length to span those features.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 177: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

175 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.122 DATUM FEATURE AT MMC

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 178: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 176

8.10.9.2 ExamplesExample 1 Figure 8.123 is the most common and the simplest case in which the feature pattern is located bytoleranced centre distances.There are three requirements which shall be satisfied independently. These are as follows:(a) The actual positional relationship of the axes of the four grouped holes shall conform to the tolerance diagram

shown in Figure 8.123(b).(b) The actual axes of the two lower holes shall conform to the tolerance diagram Figure 8.123(c).(c) The actual axes of the two left-hand holes shall conform to the tolerance diagram Figure 8.123(d).Orientation of the pattern of holes with respect to surfaces X and Y is controlled by the centre distancetolerances.Examples 2 and 3 The orientation of the pattern of holes with respect to the external surfaces is controlled inboth examples shown in Figures 8.124 and 8.125 but in different ways, i.e. by position tolerances inFigure 8.124(a) and by centre distances tolerances in Figure 8.125(a).In Figure 8.124(a) the group of five holes is located relative to the datum Group 2, consisting of the surfaces A,B and C. Group 3 consist of five holes and the datum frame. The geometric reference frame for Group 3 isshown in Figure 8.124(b) and the tolerance diagram in Figure 8.124(c).The three requirements for location contained in Figure 8.125(a) shall be satisfied independently and these areindicated in Figure 8.125(b) to (d).Examples 4 and 5 In Figures 8.126 and 8.127 the orientation of the pattern of holes relative to the externalsurfaces is not controlled by either method of dimensioning and tolerancing.In Figure 8.126(a), Group 2 consists of the three external surfaces A, B and C; Group 2 includes hole D andGroup 2 as datum; and Group 4 contains the four holes ∅ 8 with the hole D and surface A as datums. Thetolerance diagrams (which include the geometric reference frames) for Groups 3 and 4 are shown inFigure 8.126(b) and (c) respectively and these tolerance requirements shall be satisfied independently.The three requirements for location of the feature pattern in Figure 8.127(a) shall be satisfied independently andare illustrated in Figure 8.127(b) to (d).Example 6 In Figure 8.128 the axes of the three holes on the vertical centre-line shall lie between two parallelplanes as shown in Figure 8.128(c). Likewise, the axes of the three holes on the horizontal centre-line shall liebetween two parallel planes as shown in Figure 8.128(d). All three requirements shown in Figure 8.128(b) to (d)shall be complied with independently.

8.10.10 Projected tolerance zone (see Table 8.7) Normally tolerances for position apply over the whole lengthof a feature. Where it is a functional requirement that the tolerance applies over some other length, notnecessarily the length of the feature, the projected tolerance zone concept should be used. This concept shallbe indicated on the drawing by the symbol and depicted by a line Type J, parallel and adjacent to the axisor median plane of the feature and the extent of the length over which the tolerance applies indicated bydimensions to each extremity of that line as illustrated in Table 8.7.The projected tolerance zone may be adjacent as in Items 1 and 2(a), remote as in Item 2(b), within andprojected as in Item 2(c), both sides as in Item 2(d), or in two directions as in Item 2(e).

8.10.11 Counterbored holes Where position tolerances are used to locate concentric features, such ascounterbored holes, the following practices apply:(a) Where position tolerances are used to locate holes and counterbores relative to common datum features,

two tolerance frames are used. One tolerance frame is placed under the note specifying the holerequirements (group 1) and the other under the note specifying counterbore requirements (datum beinggroup 1) (see Figure 8.129). Tolerance zones for hole and counterbore are located at true position relativeto the specified datums. The tolerance zones for holes and counterbores may be the same or differentdiameters.

(b) Where position tolerances are used to locate holes and also control individual counterbore-to-holerelationships relative to different datum features, two tolerance frames are used, as in Item (a) (seeFigure 8.129).

8.10.12 Non-circular features The basic principle of true position dimensioning and position tolerancing forcircular features, such as holes and bosses, apply also to non-circular features, such as open-end slots, tabs,and elongated holes. For such features of size, a position tolerance is used to locate the centre plane establishedby parallel surfaces of the feature. The tolerance value represents a distance between two parallel planes. Thediameter symbol is omitted from the feature control frame. Examples are shown in Figures 8.131 and 8.132.

8.10.13 Spherical features A positional tolerance may be used to control the location of a spherical featurerelative to other features of a part (see Figure 8.133). The symbol for spherical diameter precedes the sizedimension of the feature. Since the feature is spherical, its tolerance zone is likewise spherical, having a diameterequal to the specified position tolerance.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 179: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

177 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.123 LOCATION OF FEATURE PATTERNS — EXAMPLE 1

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 180: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 178

FIGURE 8.124 LOCATION OF FEATURE PATTERNS — EXAMPLE 2

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 181: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

179 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.125 LOCATION OF FEATURE PATTERNS — EXAMPLE 3

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 182: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 180

FIGURE 8.126 LOCATION OF FEATURE PATTERNS — EXAMPLE 4

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 183: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

181 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.127 LOCATION OF FEATURE PATTERNS — EXAMPLE 5

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 184: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 182

FIGURE 8.128 LOCATION OF FEATURE PATTERNS — EXAMPLE 6

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 185: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

183 AS 1100.101—1992

TABLE 8.7PROJECTED TOLERANCE ZONE

(continued)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 186: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 184

TABLE 8.7 (continued)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 187: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

185 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.129 DIFFERENT POSITION TOLERANCE FOR HOLES ANDCOUNTERBORES, SAME DATUM REFERENCES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 188: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 186

FIGURE 8.130 POSITION TOLERANCE FOR COUNTERBORES, RELATIVE TO HOLES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 189: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

187 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.131 POSITION TOLERANCING OF SLOTS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 190: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 188

FIGURE 8.132 POSITION TOLERANCING OF ELONGATED HOLES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 191: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

189 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE 8.133 SPHERICAL FEATURE LOCATED BY POSITION TOLERANCING

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 192: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 190

8.11 TOLERANCES OF FORM, PROFILE, ORIENTATION, AND RUNOUT8.11.1 General This Clause establishes the principles and methods of dimensioning and tolerancing tocontrol form, profile, orientation, and runout of various geometrical shapes and free state variations.8.11.2 Form and orientation control Form tolerances control straightness, flatness, circularity, andcylindricity. Orientation tolerances control angularity, parallelism, and perpendicularity. A profile tolerance maycontrol form, orientation, and size, depending on how it is applied. Tolerances of position control orientation,the extent of this control should be considered before specifying form and orientation tolerances (seeFigure 8.120).8.11.3 Form and orientation tolerance zones A form or orientation tolerance specifies a zone within whichthe considered feature, its line elements, its axis, or its centre plane must be contained.Where the tolerance value represents the diameter of a cylindrical zone, it is preceded by the diameter symbol.In all other cases, the tolerance value represents a total linear distance between two geometric boundariesand no symbol is required.Certain designs require control over a limited area or length of the surface, rather than control of the totalsurface. In these instances, the area, or length, and its location are indicated by a Type J line drawn adjacentto the surface with appropriate dimensioning. Where so indicated, the specified tolerance applies within theselimits instead of to the total surface.8.11.4 Form tolerances8.11.4.1 General Form tolerances are applicable to single (individual) features or elements of single features;therefore, form tolerances are not related to datums. Clauses 8.11.4.2 to 8.11.4.4 cover the particulars of theform tolerances, i.e. straightness, flatness, circularity, and cylindricity.8.11.4.2 Tolerances of straightness (see Table 8.8) A straightness tolerance may be used to control thefollowing:(a) The straightness of a line on a surface The tolerance zone is the area between two parallel straight lines

in the specified plane containing the considered line, and the tolerance value is the distance between thelines.

(b) The straightness of an axis (of a feature or a series of features) in a single plane The tolerance zone isthe space between two parallel planes normal to the specified plane containing the considered axes, andthe tolerance value is the distance between the planes.

(c) The straightness in three dimensions of an axis of a feature or features which are solids ofrevolution The tolerance zone is a cylinder with a diameter equal to the tolerance value.

8.11.4.3 Tolerance of flatness (see Table 8.9) Where a flatness tolerance is used to control the flatness ofa surface, the tolerance zone is the space between two parallel planes and the tolerance value is the distancebetween the planes.The location of the two parallel planes shall be that most favourable acceptance.Flatness may be applied on a unit basis as a means of preventing an abrupt surface variation within arelatively small area of the feature. The unit variation is used either in combination with a specified totalvariation, or alone. Caution should be exercised when using unit control alone as relatively large variationsin flatness can occur unless there is a maximum overall limit specified. Since flatness involves surface area,the size of the unit area, e.g. 25 x 25, is specified to the right of the flatness tolerance, separated by a slashline. For example:

8.11.4.4 Tolerance of circularity (roundness) (see Table 8.10) A circularity tolerance may be used to controlthe errors of form of a circle in the plane in which it lies. For a solid revolution, the tolerance controls thecircularity of the circle formed by the intersection of the surface with a plane. For a cylinder or cone, the planeis perpendicular to the axis, and for a sphere it usually passes through its centre.A circularity tolerance is not concerned with the position of the circle, e.g. its concentricity with a datum axis.For a solid of revolution, the circularity of each cross-section is an individual assessment.A circularity tolerance zone is the annular space between two co-planar circles concentric with each other. Thetolerance value is the radial separation of the two circles. The size and location of the circles forming theannular tolerance zone with respect to the considered circle should be that most favourable to acceptance.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 193: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

191 AS 1100.101—1992

TABLE 8.8TOLERANCES OF STRAIGHTNESS

(continued)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 194: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 192

TABLE 8.8 (continued)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 195: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

193 AS 1100.101—1992

TABLE 8.9TOLERANCES OF FLATNESS

8.11.4.5 Tolerances of cylindricity (see Table 8.11) Cylindricity is a combination of roundness, straightnessand parallelism applied to the surface of a cylinder. The plane (end) surfaces of a cylindrical part are notcontrolled by a cylindricity tolerance.

NOTE: Although the control of roundness, straightness and parallelism by means of cylindricity tolerance may appear to be aconvenient technique, the checking of cylindricity in accordance with its definition may present considerable difficulties. It isrecommended that the individual characteristics comprising cylindricitybe toleranced separatelyas appropriate to the part concerned.

A cylindricity tolerance zone is the annular space between two cylinders coaxial with each other. The tolerancevalue is the radial separation of the two cylinders. The size and location of the cylinders forming the annulartolerance zone with respect to the considered cylinder should be that most favourable to acceptance.8.11.5 Tolerances on profiles Profiled surfaces consist of solid figures either having sections of theoreticallyidentical form, e.g. templates, disc cams, or sections of related but not identical form, e.g. aerofoils, drumcams, three-dimensional cams.The ‘profile of a line’ symbol indicates that the tolerance applies to all identical sections of the component orto the particular section designated.The ‘profile of a surface’ symbol indicates that the tolerance applies to the whole of the profiled surface.The tolerance zone associated with the profile symbols is a zone of width equal to the tolerance value normaleverywhere to the theoretical profile, and unless otherwise stated shall be equally disposed about that profile(see Table 8.12, Items 1(a) and 2).If a unilateral tolerance zone is required, this shall be clearly indicated on the drawing by a Type J line anda dimension line as in Table 8.12, Item 1(b).

NOTE: For information on tolerance zones and points of discontinuity, see Clauses 8.3.14 and 8.3.15.Profiles defined by a combination of circular arcs and straight lines shall be toleranced by indicating alldimensions as basic and the applicable profile tolerance in the tolerance table or frame (see Table 8.12).Profiles defined by cartesian coordinates shall be toleranced by indicating both the abscissae and ordinatesas basic dimensions and the applicable profile tolerance in a tolerance table or frame (see Table 8.12).

NOTE: For other methods not using geometry tolerance, see Clause 8.3.15.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 196: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 194

TABLE 8.10TOLERANCES OF CIRCULARITY

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 197: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

195 AS 1100.101—1992

TABLE 8.11TOLERANCES OF CYLINDRICITY

Profiles defined by polar coordinates shall be toleranced by indicating both the angular displacements andappropriate radii or radii over a follower as tangent point dimensions and the applicable profile tolerance ina tolerance table or frame.

NOTE: For other methods not using geometry tolerance, see Clause 8.3.15.Three-dimensional profile surfaces shall be toleranced by a combination of one or more of the methodsdescribed for:(i) profiles defined by a combination of circular arcs and straight lines,(ii) profiles defined by cartesian coordinates,(iii) profiles defined by polar coordinates,

as appropriate to the function of the part. If the theoretical surface is defined by all basic dimensions, anda profile tolerance quoted in the tolerance table or frame, the complete surface shall lie between twosurfaces which envelop a series of spheres of diameter equal to the tolerance value with their centres onthe theoretical surface (see Table 8.13). If a unilateral tolerance zone is specified, the surfaces of thespheres touch the theoretical surface.

8.11.6 Orientation tolerances8.11.6.1 General Angularity, parallelism and perpendicularity are orientation tolerances applicable to relatedfeatures. These tolerances control the orientation of features to one another.8.11.6.2 Specifying orientation tolerances in relation to datum features In specifying orientation tolerancesto control angularity, parallelism and perpendicularity, the considered feature is related to one or more datumfeatures. Relation to more than one datum feature should be considered if required to stabilize the tolerancezone in more than one direction. For a method of referencing datum features (see Clauses 8.4.4.6 and 8.4.5.7,and Table 8.16). Note that angularity, perpendicularity, and parallelism, when applied to plane surfaces, controlflatness if a flatness tolerance is not specified.8.11.7 Tolerances of squareness (See Table 8.14) The toleranced feature may be a line or a surface andthe datum feature may be a line or a plane. In general, the tolerance zone is the area between two parallellines or the space between two parallel planes which are perpendicular to the datum feature and the tolerancevalue is the distance between the lines or the planes. For a line with respect to a datum plane, the tolerancezone may alternatively be the space within a cylinder of diameter equal to the tolerance value.8.11.8 Tolerances on parallelism (see Table 8.15) The toleranced feature may be a line or surface andthe datum feature may be a line or a plane. In general, the tolerance zone is the area between two parallellines or the space between two parallel planes which are parallel to the datum feature and the tolerance valueis the distance between the lines or the planes. For a line parallel to a datum line, the tolerance zone mayalternatively be the space within a cylinder of diameter equal to the tolerance value and whose axis is parallelto the datum.8.11.9 Tolerances of angularity (see Table 8.16) The toleranced feature may be a line or surface and thedatum feature may be a line or a plane. The tolerance zone is the area between two parallel lines or the spacebetween two parallel planes which are inclined at the specified angle to the datum feature and the tolerancevalue is the distance between the lines or the planes.The tolerance zone may also be the space within a cylinder of diameter equal to the tolerance value.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 198: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 196

TABLE 8.12TOLERANCES OF PROFILE — LINE

(continued)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 199: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

197 AS 1100.101—1992

TABLE 8.12 (continued)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 200: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 198

TABLE 8.13TOLERANCES OF PROFILE — SURFACE

8.11.10 Application of zero MMC Where it is necessary to specify that any errors of geometry are to becontained within the maximum material limits of a feature, this shall be indicated as shown in Figure 8.134.In this example, the indication means that if the feature is finished everywhere on its maximum limits of size,it must be perfectly square to the datum surface. Errors of squareness are permissible only if the feature isfinished away from the maximum material limits of size in the direction of least material, provided that theminimum limits of size are everywhere observed.It should be noted that zero geometry tolerances can only be associated with the maximum material conditionas to do otherwise would be to demand perfection.

FIGURE 8.134 APPLICATION OF ZERO MMC

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 201: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

199 AS 1100.101—1992

TABLE 8.14TOLERANCES OF SQUARENESS

(continued)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 202: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 200

TABLE 8.14 (continued)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 203: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

201 AS 1100.101—1992

TABLE 8.15TOLERANCES OF PARALLELISM

(continued)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 204: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 202

TABLE 8.15 (continued)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 205: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

203 AS 1100.101—1992

TABLE 8.16TOLERANCES OF ANGULARITY

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 206: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 204

8.11.11 Runout (see Table 8.17) Although it conforms to the definition of ‘geometry tolerance’ inClause 8.4.2.10, runout is in a class apart from the geometry tolerances covered in Clauses 8.10.4 and 8.11.4.In these, the geometry relationship is fundamental to the conception of the tolerance, and the method ofverification is not of fundamental importance, provided that it conforms to the geometrical principle. Runout,however, is defined in terms of its measurement under rotation and demands a practical test. The resultantindication may include errors of other characteristics but without differentiating between them. The combinederrors shall not exceed the stated tolerance value shown.The runout tolerance represents the maximum permissible variation of position (i.e. full indicator movement)of the considered feature with respect to a fixed point during one complete revolution about the datum axiswithout axial movement. Except when otherwise stated, this variation is measured in the direction indicatedby the arrow at the end of the leader which points to the toleranced feature.Runout may sometimes be applied as a composite tolerance in place of separate specifications of othergeometry tolerances, e.g. roundness or concentricity. But it should not, however, be used where the designrequirement demands that these characteristics be separately controlled. Where required, runout tolerancesas well as other geometry tolerances may be specified for a part or feature.In accordance with Clause 8.4.4.5, the width of the runout tolerance zone lies in the direction of the arrowterminating the leader. This will often, but not necessarily, be normal to the surface.

TABLE 8.17TOLERANCES OF RUNOUT

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 207: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

205 AS 1100.101—1992

8.11.12 Total runout (see Table 8.18) The total runout tolerance represents the maximum permissiblevariation of the position of a point moving along a considered feature during a series of revolutions about thedatum axis. The total runout tolerance applies to all measuring positions on the generated surface.Except where otherwise stated, this variation is measured in the direction indicated by the arrow at the endof the leader which points to the toleranced feature.The runout tolerance may include defects of form and defects of orientation and position from a datum axis,provided that any individual defect or the collective defects do not exceed the specified total runout toleranceacross or along the total considered surface.

TABLE 8.18TOLERANCES OF TOTAL RUNOUT

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 208: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 206

SECTION 9 CONVENTIONAL REPRESENTATIONS

9.1 SCOPE OF SECTION This Section specifies conventions for the representation of components andrepetitive features of components. These conventions are simplified drafting techniques for depicting acomponent or repetitive feature, by orthographic projection, to obviate unnecessary detailing.For conventional representation peculiar to disciplines, refer to the appropriate parts of AS 1100. Theconventions illustrated are typical of common items and should be amended as necessary for other items.9.2 METHOD OF PRESENTATION A conventional representation may be either a simplified drawing of thefeature being depicted or a symbol for the feature being depicted, e.g. a cross representing a rivet (seeClause 9.3.5).Where the conventional representation is a simplified drawing, it is drawn to scale. Dimensions and otherdetails may be applied directly to this drawing or by means of tabulated data or other suitable methods.Where the conventional representation is a symbol, there is no relationship between the size of the symboland the size of the feature it depicts.9.3 REPRESENTATION OF FEATURES AND PARTS9.3.1 Repeated features and parts Similar features in a regular pattern, such as holes or slots, may berepresented by one or more such features in full outline and the remainder by centre-line as shown inTable 9.1.Similar parts in an assembly forming a regular pattern may be represented by one or more such part in fulloutline and the remainder by centre-lines.

TABLE 9.1ARRAY OF SIMILAR FEATURES AND PARTS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 209: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

207 AS 1100.101—1992

9.3.2 Screw threads Screw threads shall be specified in accordance with the relevant Standard.A screw thread may be represented as follows and as shown in Table 9.2:(a) End view Crests of thread are represented by a circle in a Type A line and the roots of the thread by an

arc of a circle in a Type B line. The gap between the ends of the arc should subtend approximately 30°to 45°.

(b) Side view — External threads and sectional internal threads Crests of thread are represented by Type Astraight lines. Roots of thread are represented by Type B straight lines of length equal to the length of fullthread. Runouts may also be shown, and if so as Type B lines at an angle of 30° to the axis of the thread.

(c) Side view — Internal threads Crests of thread and roots of thread are represented by Type E hiddenoutlines (see Table 9.2 (c)). The length of the line indicating the roots of thread should equal the lengthof full thread. Runouts may also be shown, and if so as Type F lines at an angle of 30° to the axis of thethread.

(d) Limit of useful length of threads The limit of useful length of threads is represented with a Type A line ifthe limit is visible or a Type F line if the limit is hidden. These lines extend across the major diameter ofthe thread.

The representations described above apply to all types of thread form. However, if the thread is of other thanV-form, a section or other detail view should be drawn to illustrate the thread form.

TABLE 9.2SCREW THREADS

NOTES:1 These views are also to a ‘convention’ as the projection of a helix is not a straight line.2 This method should be used where it is desired to show the thread runout.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 210: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 208

9.3.3 Threaded fasteners For convenience threaded fasteners have been grouped as follows:(a) Bolts, screws, and nuts having external hexagonal features.(b) Screws having internal hexagonal features.(c) Bolts and nuts having external square features.(d) Screws having slotted or cross-recessed heads.Sizes of hexagon and square features in Items (a), (b), and (c) are related to the dimensions across oppositefaces, i.e. to the nominal size of spanner or key used in assembly operations. Given the nominal size of thethreaded fastener, i.e. the major diameter of the thread form, the dimensions across flats and otherdimensional features shall be obtained from the relevant Standard.The features and approximate sizes of the hexagons and squares of these threaded fasteners may berepresented as shown in Table 9.3 in which the proportions are based on the nominal diameter (D)* Chamferand washer faces need not be shown, but chamfers may be represented by circular arcs as shown inTable 9.3.The slots in slotted nuts and castle nuts may be represented by lines as shown in Column 3 of Table 9.3.These lines shall be thicker than the outline.The dimensions which determine the shape and size of the various features of the circular heads of bolts andscrews in Item (d) do not vary proportionately with nominal diameter (D), and hence reference should be madeto the appropriate Standard to obtain values for drafting purposes. The screwdriver slot or cross-recess maybe represented by lines as shown in the examples in Column 3 of Table 9.3.

TABLE 9.3 THREAD FASTENERS(A) EXTERNAL HEXAGONAL FEATURES

(continued)

* These proportions vary to some extent within the size range of threaded fasteners.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 211: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

209 AS 1100.101—1992

TABLE 9.3 (A) EXTERNAL HEXAGONAL FEATURES (continued)

(continued)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 212: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 210

TABLE 9.3 (continued)(B) INTERNAL HEXAGONAL FEATURES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 213: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

211 AS 1100.101—1992

TABLE 9.3 (continued)(D) SCREWS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 214: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 212

9.3.4 Threaded assemblies In sectional views of assembled threads, except those of thread inserts, thecrest of external threads shall be represented by Type A straight lines and the roots by Type B straight lines.Thread inserts shall be shown with the external and internal crests represented by Type A straight lines andthe roots by Type B straight lines.Hexagon bolt heads and nuts which are capable of being rotated should be represented across corners in bothside views to show the working clearance, and for the purpose of identification.Gaps in helical-spring lock washers should be represented by lines at 45° in both side views for the purposeof identification.Screwdriver slots in machine screws should be represented with full view slots in both side views.

TABLE 9.4THREADED ASSEMBLIES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 215: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

213 AS 1100.101—1992

9.3.5 Riveted assemblies The complete specification of the rivets shall be given by a leader and a note.The position of a rivet is represented by the symbol + indicating the centre of the rivet in an assembly.If the assembly consists of one or more rows of rivets each containing a number of rivets, the conventionalrepresentation shown in Clause 9.3.1 may be applied as shown in Table 9.5.If the assembly consists of more than one type, diameter or length of rivet, then a set of coded symbols maybe used to assist in the representation. The code may make provision for field rivets as well as shop rivets.Drawings using this method shall also contain the code or refer to a reference drawing.

TABLE 9.5RIVETED ASSEMBLIES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 216: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 214

APPENDIX ASOME COMPARISONS OF ISO STANDARDS WITH THIS STANDARD

AND OTHER NATIONAL STANDARDS(Informative)

A1 SYMBOLS Table A1 provides a comparison of the symbols used by ISO with those adopted by Australia,UK, USA and Canada.

TABLE A1COMPARISON OF SYMBOLS

(continued)

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 217: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

215 AS 1100.101—1992

TABLE A1 (continued)

LEGEND:

Same = same as in Column 2 (ISO)— = nonex = a dimensional valueA = an upper case letter

NOTE: The symbol has been adopted by ISO/TC 10/SC 5 but not yet embodied in any ISO standard.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 218: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 216

A2 OTHER COMPARISONSA2.1 Shape of tolerance zoneISO: Zone is total width in direction of leader arrow.

∅ specified where zone is circular or cylindrical.Australia, USA and UK: Same.Canada: Zone shape evident from characteristic being controlled.

A2.2 Combination of position tolerancing and centre distance tolerancingISO: Not yet defined.Australia and Canada: Specify that dimensions with centre distance tolerances shall comply with requirementsindependently of dimensions with geometry tolerances.USA and UK: Allow hole centres in a group to exceed centre distance tolerances by an amount equal toone-half of the specified position tolerance where the feature is at MMC.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 219: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

217 AS 1100.101—1992

APPENDIX BEXAMPLES OF GEOMETRY TOLERANCE DISPLAY

(Informative)

B1 SCOPE This Appendix illustrates a number of practical examples of the tolerance frame and tabularmethods of display described in Clause 8.4.4 and compares each method on the same component.B2 EXAMPLES OF GEOMETRY TOLERANCE SPECIFICATION Figure B1 illustrates the drawing of acomplicated component using the tabular method of display, whereas Figure B2 shows the same componentusing the tolerance frame method. Figure B3 shows a drawing of simple component also using the toleranceframe method of presentation.

FIGURE B1 COMPLICATED COMPONENT — TABULAR METHOD

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 220: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 218

FIGURE B3 SIMPLE COMPONENT — TOLERANCE FRAME METHOD

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 221: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

219 AS 1100.101—1992

APPENDIX CAXONOMETRIC PROJECTION — ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

(Informative)

C1 SCOPE This Appendix describes techniques for developing axonometric projections (see Clause 6.5).C2 DRAFTING AIDS The following drafting aids give assistance to drafters in the preparation of drawing inaxonometric projection:(a) For isometric drawings

(i) Special paper ruled in three directions at 120° to each other.(ii) Templates with a wide range of ellipses to represent circles.

(b) For dimetric drawings A special type of set square illustrated in Figure C1.(c) For trimetric drawings A special type of set square illustrated in Figure C2 giving a range of angles, each

with its own scale.

FIGURE C1 SPECIAL SET SQUARE FOR DIMETRIC PROJECTION

C3 REPRESENTATION OF CIRCLESC3.1 Axonometric drawing The projection of a circle in a principal plane in any axonometric drawing is anellipse. The major axis of this ellipse is perpendicular to the third principal axis. This relationship is of practicalsignificance in assisting freehand drawing. (See Figure C3.)C3.2 Isometric drawing A method of construction of approximations to ellipses is illustrated in Figure C4.It should be noted that the major axis of an ellipse (e.g. part of line EG in Figure C4) in a principal plane isperpendicular to the third principal axis.C3.3 Dimetric drawing A method of construction of approximations to ellipses is illustrated in Figure C5.C4 AXONOMETRIC SCALE RATIOSC4.1 Equations

Scale on OX = . . . . C4.1 (1)

Scale on OY = . . . . C4.1 (2)

Scale on OZ = . . . .C4.1 (3)

From Equation C4.1(2), α + β < 90°.See Figure C6 for definitions of α and β.C4.2 IsometricSelect α = β + 30°.Then actual scales are all equal to , i.e. 0.816.(2/3)

∴ x:y:z = 1:1:1

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 222: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 220

FIGURE C3 REPRESENTATION OF CIRCLES IN AXONOMETRIC DRAWING

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 223: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

221 AS 1100.101—1992

1. Locate centre O by centre-lines COA and BOD. OA = OB = OC = OD = radius of circle.2. Through B and D draw EBF and GDH parallel to COA. Through A and C draw EAH and FCG parallel to

BOD.3. Locate points J and K on GOE such that GK = EJ = OA.4. With centre H and radius R1 (= HB) draw arc between HJ produced at L and HK produced at M. Similarly

with centre F.5. With centres J and K and radius R2 (= HB - HJ) complete the figure.

FIGURE C4 CONSTRUCTION OF APPROXIMATE ELLIPSES REPRESENTINGCIRCLES IN ISOMETRIC DRAWING

FIGURE C5 CONSTRUCTION OF APPROXIMATE ELLIPSES REPRESENTINGCIRCLES IN DIMETRIC DRAWING

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 224: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 222

C4.3 DimetricSelect α = 2β = 90°, or α = β, or 2α + β = 90° (provided α 30° and β 30°).In particular, select α = arc tan (1/63) and β = arc tan (7/9); i.e. α = 7° (approximately) and β = 41.5°(approximately) to achieve the desired x:y:z ratio.Then actual scales are (8/9), (8/9) and (2/9); i.e. 0.943, 0.943 and 0.471.

∴x:y:z = 1:1:0.5C4.4 TrimetricSelect α and β so that α + 2β 90°, or 2α + β 90°, or α β.Using a special set square, such as that shown in Figure C2, scale ratios will depend on the angles involved.For example, if provision is made for α = 10° and β = 45° then the actual scales are 0.936, 0.908 and 0.548.

∴x:y:z = 1:0.970:0.585.

FIGURE C6 AXONOMETRIC SCALE RATIOS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 225: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

223 AS 1100.101—1992

APPENDIX DOBLIQUE PROJECTION — ANGLE OF LINE OF SIGHT

(Informative)

D1 SCOPE This Appendix demonstrates the relationship between the angle of the line of sight and the scaleon the receding axis in oblique projected views.D2 CALCULATION OF SCALE Let OP be the third principal axis of an object of length a, where O is in thepicture of the plane and P is behind the picture plane. (See Figure D1).

FIGURE D1 CALCULATION OF SCALE

Let Θ be the angle that the parallel lines of sight make with the picture plane.Then a line of sight from the point P will lie on the surface of a cone, the base of which is in the picture planeand the radius of which is r, where r = a cot Θ.Any radial line of this circle represents the projection of OP and hence, the scale of the oblique projection ofOP to the true length of OP is cot Θ.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 226: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 224

Any plane through the axis of this cone may then be selected and will make an angle β, say, with thehorizontal and the intersection of this plane on the picture plane will produce an oblique projection of OP.Thus although the scale is fixed by cot Θ, β may be any angle in the oblique drawing. As noted inClause 6.6.2, this is, for convenience, selected as 30°, 45°, or 60°.To obtain equal scale on receding axis, i.e. ‘cavalier’:

Θ = arc cot 1= 45°

To obtain a scale ratio of 0.5 on receding axis, i.e. ‘cabinet’:Θ = arc cot 0.5

= 63° 26’ approx.To obtain any other scale ratio (R) on receding axis, i.e. ‘general oblique’:

Θ = arc cot R

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 227: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

225 AS 1100.101—1992

APPENDIX EMAXIMUM MATERIAL PRINCIPLE

(Informative)

E1 SCOPE This Appendix provides an example of specifying geometric tolerance applied on a maximummaterial condition basis.E2 INTRODUCTION The maximum material principle arises from consideration of the free assembly of twomating groups of features and is a result of the development of the theory of tolerancing for position,concentricity and symmetry. This theory of tolerancing establishes for each functional group —(a) a geometric reference frame (GRF);(b) a tolerance diagram; and(c) a virtual component.Assembly is assured if the virtual components are capable of assembly.The example given in Figure E1 illustrates the above theory.

NOTE: The virtual size of a hole is its low size minus the position tolerance.The virtual size of a pin is its high size plus the position tolerance.The virtual sizes for the mating groups are determined as follows:

4 x ∅ 8 holes : ∅ 8 - ∅ 0.2 = ∅ 7.8∅ 10 hole C: ∅ 10 - ∅ 0 = ∅ 104 x ∅ 7.5 pins : ∅ 7.5 + ∅ 0.2 = ∅ 7.7∅ 10 pin D : ∅ 10 + ∅ 0 = ∅ 10

Study of the two diagrams will show that the two virtual components are capable of assembly and hence the tolerances indicatedwill ensure assembly.

E3 CONDITIONS FOR FREE ASSEMBLY OF COMPONENTS It should be noted that more clearance forassembly will be present if the actual sizes of the mating features are away from the maximum material limitsof size, and if the actual errors of form or position are less than the maximum.It follows, therefore, that if this is the case, the error of form or position may exceed the specified tolerancewithout preventing assembly.This effective increase of tolerance, which is applicable to toleranced centre distances (see Clause 8.3.11) aswell as to tolerances of position and to certain tolerances of form, is advantageous for manufacture, but maynot always be permissible from the functional point of view. For example, in position tolerancing the increaseof tolerance can generally be permitted on the centre distances of such features as bolt holes and studs, butit may not be permissible in such things as kinematic linkages and gear centres.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 228: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 226

(b) Geometric reference frame for group 1

FIGURE E1 (in part) MAXIMUM MATERIAL PRINCIPLE RELATED TO MATING COMPONENTS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 229: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

227 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE E1 (in part) MAXIMUM MATERIAL PRINCIPLE RELATED TO MATING COMPONENTS

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 230: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 228

APPENDIX FORIENTATION OF ACTUAL LINES AND SURFACES

(Informative)

F1 SCOPE This Appendix provides an illustration of the definition of the angle between two lines, asdescribed in Clause 8.3.8.2.

F2 DEFINITION The orientation of an actual line is the orientation of a pair of parallel straight lines with theleast separation which completely envelop the actual line.The orientation of an actual surface is the orientation of a pair of parallel planes with the least separationwhich completely envelop the actual surface.

F3 EXAMPLE Some possible orientations of the ideal line or surface relative to the actual line or surface areillustrated in Figure F1 such as A1—B1, A2—B2 and A3—B3.

FIGURE F1 ORIENTATION OF IDEAL LINE OR SURFACE RELATIVE TO THEACTUAL LINE OR SURFACE

Orientation A1—B1 A2—B2 A3—B3

Corresponding separationof enveloping lines h1 h2 h3or planes

In Figure F1 h1<h2<h3

Hence, the orientation of the ideal line or surface corresponding to the actual lines or surfaces is A1—B1.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 231: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

229 AS 1100.101—1992

APPENDIX GCOMPARISON OF COORDINATE AND POSITION TOLERANCING

(Informative)

G1 SCOPE This Appendix provides reasons for using positional tolerances when there are more than twofeatures in a functional group.G2 COMPARISON OF COORDINATE TOLERANCES WITH POSITION TOLERANCES IN THE CONTROLOF ERRORS IN POSITION OF RELATED FEATURES Where there are only two features to be correlated,either the method of directly toleranced coordinate dimensions or that using position tolerances may besuitable, but where the group of features contains more than two features, the latter method offers definiteadvantages. Figure G1 shows a component with four holes toleranced by the directly toleranced coordinatedimension method. The requirement could be interpreted as being that of a series of groups of two features,i.e. AB, BC, and CD. If this interpretation be acceptable, there is no harm in using this method of tolerancingbut if the four holes constitute one group which has to accept four pins on another component, the inevitableaccumulation of tolerances on dimensions AC, BD, and AD may lead to difficulty in assembly. It would thenbe necessary to reduce the tolerances on AB, BC, and CD to one-third of that theoretically permissible in orderto keep the variations of AD within acceptable limits.Even if the dimensioning in Figure G2 were used, there is a possibility of an accumulation of errors ondimensions BC, CD, and BD which will require the tolerance on AB, AC, AD to be restricted to one-half of thatwhich is theoretically permissible. The holes shown in both Figures G1 and G2 would also need to becontrolled in the direction at right angles to the horizontal centre-line.

FIGURE G1 COORDINATE TOLERANCE METHOD FIGURE G2 POSITION TOLERANCE METHOD

G3 COORDINATE TOLERANCING Where features are positioned in relation to prepared plane surfaces asin Figure G3, the accuracy of their positioning depends largely on the mutual accuracy of the plane surfaces.Such a system of holes is in reality not a single group but a number of simple groups of two features of whichone is a plane surface and the other a hole. The tolerances of position can be shown graphically as inFigure G4. This is not strictly correct (see Figure 8.56). If it is assumed that the plane surfaces are exactlyat 90° to each other, the maximum permissible variation in centre distances AD and BC is 2 x 0.4 = 0.5656.If this component is to assemble with another having four pins, this value of 0.5656 should be used whenassessing the amount of clearance necessary to ensure the assembly of the mating features. If, however thereis no guarantee of accuracy between the plane surfaces, the normal positions of the holes may not lie at thecorners of a true square and it will then be impossible to forecast whether or not there will be trouble-freeassembly.The relative positions of holes dimensioned as in Figure G5 are even more difficult to control than those inFigures G1, G2, and G3 since each of the four centre distances can be correct even when the framework ofthe centre-lines departs considerably from the true rectangular shape.

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 232: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 230

G4 POSITION TOLERANCING WITH TRUE POSITION DIMENSIONS The use of position tolerances avoidsall the difficulties discussed in Paragraphs G2 and G3. The difficulties are avoided because the positiontolerance for a feature limits the variation of position in a defined group of features, and not the variation ofspecified centre distances. In Figure G6, the drawing and the tolerance diagram illustrate that there is noaccumulation of errors of position and that the permissible variation of centre distances, even diagonally, isthe same between any pair of holes. This considerably simplifies the assessment of the sizes of matingfeatures to maintain required clearances.G5 RECTANGULAR TOLERANCE ZONES In the exceptional case of tolerance zones other than circularbeing essential (e.g. square or rectangular), they may be specified relative to the true geometric positiondefined by basic dimensions as shown in Figure G7. However this practice is not recommended.G6 RECOMMENDATION Positional tolerances should be applied wherever there are more than two featuresin a functional group, and the maximum material condition concept specified wherever functionally possible,to facilitate production and checking.

FIGURE G6 USE OF POSITION TOLERANCES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 233: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

231 AS 1100.101—1992

FIGURE G7 TOLERANCE ZONES SPECIFIED RELATIVE TO TRUE GEOMETRIC POSITION

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 234: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 232

APPENDIX HINTERPRETATION OF DATUMS

(Normative)

H1 SCOPE This Appendix sets out methods for establishing datums for a number of applications.H2 INTRODUCTION Features indicated as datums have inherent inaccuracies resulting from the productionprocess. These may take the form of convex, concave or conical deviations. The following methods areexamples for establishing datums.H3 DATUM BEING A STRAIGHT LINE OR A PLANE The datum feature shall be arranged in such a waythat the maximum distance between it and the simulated datum feature has the least possible value. Shouldthe datum feature not be stable with the contacting surface, suitable supports should be placed between themat a practical distance apart. For lines, use two supports (see Figure H1) and for flat surfaces, use threesupports.

FIGURE H1 CONTACT BETWEEN DATUM FEATURE AND SIMULATED DATUM FEATURE

H4 DATUM BEING THE AXIS OF A CYLINDER The datum is the axis of the largest inscribed cylinder ofa hole or the smallest circumscribed cylinder of a shaft, so located that any possible movement of the cylinderin any direction is equalized (see Figure H2).

FIGURE H2 DATUM IS AXIS OF A CYLINDER

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 235: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

233 AS 1100.101—1992

H5 DATUM BEING THE COMMON AXIS OR COMMON MEDIAN PLANE In the example shown inFigure H3, the datum is the common axis formed by the two smallest circumscribed coaxial cylinders.

FIGURE H3 DATUM IS COMMON AXIS OR COMMON MEDIUM PLANE

H6 DATUM BEING THE AXIS OF A CYLINDER AND PERPENDICULAR TO A PLANE In the exampleshown in Figure H4 the datum ‘A’ is the plane represented by the contacting flat surface and the datum ‘B’is the axis of the largest inscribed cylinder, perpendicular to the datum ‘A’.

NOTE: In the above example, the datum ‘A’ is considered to be primary and the datum ‘B’ secondary.

FIGURE H4 DATUM IS AXIS OF A CYLINDER AND PERPENDICULAR TO A PLANE

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 236: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 234

NOTES

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 237: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

235 AS 1100.101—1992

INDEX

AbbreviationsGeneral Clause 1.4Decod ing Tab le 1.2Encod ing Tab le 1.1

Aligned sections Clause 7.4.5Angle between two lines Append ix FAngular dimens ions Clause 8.2.4.3

Tolerancing Clause 8.3.8.2, Appendix FAngular surfaces — Tolerancing Clause 8.3.12Application of lines Clause 3.5Arrange ment drawing Clause 2.2.2Arrowheads Clause 4.3.3, 4.3.4.4.Assembly Clause 2.2.15Assembly drawing Clause 2.2.3, 2.5.8.3Auxiliary aligned section Clause 7.4.5Auxiliary dimens ions Clause 8.2.5.4Auxiliary planes of projection Clause 6.4.5Auxiliary views Clause 6.3.7Axis (of a feature) Clause 8.3.2.1Axonometric projection Clause 6.5, Appendix CAxonometric scale ratios Clause C4

Basic dimension Clause 8.3.2.2Basic dimension symbol Clause 8.3.3.6Basic taper (or basic ang le) Clause 8.3.13.1(a),

method 8.3.13.2Bolts — Conventional represen tation Clause 9.3.3, Table 9.3Borders Clause 2.5.1Break lines in sections Clause 7.4.9.5

Cabinet projection Clause 6.6.2Camera alignment marks Clause 2.5.3Cavalier projection Clause 6.6.2Characters Clause 4.1.1.

Decimal Clause 4.1.6Height Clause 4.1.2Spacing Clause 4.1.4Thickness Clause 4.1.3Use of Clause 4.1.5Vulgar fractions Clause 4.1.7

CirclesDimensioning Clause 8.2.6.1, 8.2.6.2Representation in projections Clause C3

Control drawing clause 2.2.4Conventional represen tations Section 9,

See also AS 1100.201Coordinate system in spatial

geometry Clause 6.4.2Countersinks, coun terboxes ,

spotfaces — Dimens ioning Clause 8.2.6.8Curve

Dimensioning Clause 8.2.6.6, 8.2.6.11Tolerancing Clause 8.3.15

Cutting planes Clause 6.4.6Cutting planes — Sections Clause 7.2

Dashes Clause 3.2.2Datum Clause 8.3.2.3, 8.6.2,

8.6.5, Appendix HDimension Clause 8.3.2.4Feature Clause 8.3.2.5, 8.3.3.3,

8.6.4Group Clause 8.4.2.1, 8.6.5Ident ifying letters Clause 8.3.3.4Reference frame Clause 8.6.3Simulated Clause 8.3.2.6Specification and interpretation Clause 8.6System Clause 8.4.2.2Target Clause 8.3.2.7, 8.6.6Target symbol Clause 8.3.3.5

Decimal form Clause 4.1.6Descriptive geometry Clause 6.4.1Detail assembly drawing Clause 2.2.5Detail drawing Clause 2.2.6, 2.5.8.2Diagrammatic drawing Clause 2.2.7Diameters — Dimens ioning Clause 8.2.6.1Dimension Clause 8.1.1.1, 8.2.4Dimension datum symbol Clause 8.3.3.9Dimension limits Clause 8.3.9, 8.3.11.2Dimension lines Clause 3.5.2(b), 8.2.3.2

Dimensioning Clause 8.2, 8.3Angular dimens ions Clause 8.2.4.3Arrangement Clause 8.2.5Auxiliary dimens ion Clause 8.2.5.4Chamfers Clause 8.2.6.7Countersinks, coun terbores,

spotfaces Clause 8.2.6.8Curved surfaces Clause 8.2.6.6, 8.2.6.11Diameters Clause 8.2.6.1Dimension lines Clause 8.2.3.2Dimensions Clause 8.2.4Equal dimens ions Clause 8.2.6.5Funct ional dimensions Clause 8.2.2.1Holes Clause 8.2.6.4Leade rs Clause 8.2.3.3Linear dimens ions Clause 8.2.4.2Not-to-scale dimensions Clause 8.2.5.3Projection lines Clause 8.2.3.1Pictorial drawings Clause 6.8.5Profiles Clause 8.2.6.11Radii Clause 8.2.6.2Reference dimens ion Clause 8.2.5.4.2Screw threads Clause 8.2.6.9Slopes Clause 8.2.6.12Spher ical diameter Clause 8.2.6.1(e)Squares Clause 8.2.6.3Symbols Figure 4,14, Clause 8.2.1Tabular presen tation of

dimensions Clause 8.2.5.2Tapers Clause 8.2.6.10, 8.2.6.12,

Tab le 8.1Dimensions of lines Clause 3.2Dimetric projection Clause 6.5.2, 6.5.3.2,6.5.4.2Dots Clause 4.3.4.4

Terminating line Clause 4.3.4.1Terminating leaders Clause 4.3.4.2Used as dec imal sign Clause 4.1.6.1

Drawing Clause 2.2.1Drawing sheets

Layou t Clause 2.5Materials Clause 2.3Sizes Clause 2.4

Drawing typesArrangement Clause 2.2.2Assembly Clause 2.2.3Control Clause 2.2.4Detail assembly Clause 2.2.5Detail Clause 2.2.6Diagrammatic Clause 2.2.7Electrotechno logy Clause 2.2.13General arrange ment Clause 2.2.8Installation Clause 2.2.9Monod etail Clause 2.2.10Multidetail Clause 2.2.11Subassembly Clause 2.2.15Tabulated Clause 2.2.12Works as executed Clause 2.2.14

Electrotechnology drawing Clause 2.2.13End produc t Clause 2.2.16Engineering and architectural

drawing scales Clause 5.4.1, Table 5.1Envelope principle Clause 8.3.5, 8.3.10Envelope symbol Clause 8.3.3.10Equal dimens ions Clause 8.2.6.5

Fas tening elements in sections Clause 7.4.9.1Fea ture Clause 8.3.2.8, 8.3.11Fea ture symbols Clause 8.3.3.3, 8.3.3.6Filing margin Clause 2.5.1.2First ang le projection — Symbol Clause 2.5.6(a)First ang le projection Clause 6.3.2, 6.3.3Fitting to gaug e or mating part Clause 8.3.13.1(c)Flat surfaces Clause 3.6.1Flow chart Clause 2.2.17Fold lines Clause 2.5.7Form tolerances Clause 8.11.4Format lines Clause 2.5.12Full sections Clause 7.4.2Functional dimensions Clause 8.2.2.1

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 238: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

AS 1100.101—1992 236

Gauge or mating part Clause 8.3.13.4Gears and splines — Orientation

and locat ion Clause 8.9General arrange ment drawing Clause 2.2.8General oblique projection Clause 6.6.2Geometric reference frame Clause 8.4.2.3Geometry tolerancing — See also

Tolerancing Clause 8.4Angularity Clause 8.11.9Circularity (roundne ss) Clause 8.11.4.4Concentric features Clause 8.10.11Concentricity Clause 8.10.4Coord inate and pos ition

tolerancing Appendix GCounterbored holes Clause 8.10.11Cylindricity Clause 8.11.4.5Datum specification Clause 8.6Examples See AS1100.201Feature patterns Clause 8.10.9Flatness Clause 8.11.4.3Form Clause 8.11.4Line Clause 8.11.5Maximum material condition Clause 8.5Methods — Preferences Clause 8.4.4.2MMC Clause 8.10.6, 8.10.7,

8.10.8MMC — Zero Clause 8.11.10Non-circular features Clause 8.10.12Orientation Clause 8.11.6Parallelism Clause 8.11.8Position Clause 8.10, G4Profiles Clause 8.11.5Projected tolerance zone Clause 8.10.10Runou t Clause 8.11.11Runou t — Tota l Clause 8.11.12Slots Clause 8.10.12Spher ical features Clause 8.10.13Squareness Clause 8.11.7Straightness Clause 8.11.4.2Surface Clause 8.11.5Symmetry Clause 8.10.5Tabular method Clause 8.4.5, Appendix BTolerance frame method Clause 8.4.4.3, Appendix BTotal runout Clause 8.11.12True position dimension Clause 8.10.3Virtual cond ition Clause 8.7Zero MMC Clause 8.11.10

Grid referencing Clause 2.5.4

Half sections Clause 7.4.3Hatching Clause 7.3Height of characters Clause 4.1.2Holes — Dimensioning Clause 8.2.6.4Holes in flanges in sections Clause 7.4.9.3

Installation Clause 2.2.18Installation drawing Clause 2.2.9Interposed sections Clause 7.4.7Isometric projection Clause 6.5.2, 6.5.3.2,

6.5.4.1Item Clause 4.2.2.1

Reference number Clause 4.2.2.2References Clause 4.2

Layout of drawings sheets Clause 2.5, 2.5.8Leaders Clause 8.2.3.3Least material cond ition Clause 8.4.2.4Letters See CharactersLine density Clause 3.4Line spacing Clause 3.3Lines

Adjacent parts Clause 3.5.9(a)Applications Clause 3.5Break lines Clause 3.5.3Centre-lines Clause 3.5.6Centre-lines — Short Clause 3.5.2(h)Centroidal Clause 3.5.9(c)Cutting planes Clause 3.5.7Dashes Clause 3.2.2Density Clause 3.4Dimension Clause 3.5.2(b)Dimension of lines Clause 3.2Fictitious outline Clause 3.5.2(a)Flat surface Clause 3.6.1Fold lines Clause 3.5.2(g)

Format Clause 2.5.12Hatching Clause 3.5.2(c)Hidden outline Clause 3.5.4Imaginary intersections Clause 3.5.2(f)Material to be removed Clause 3.5.6Movab le parts Clause 3.5.9(b)Outlines Clause 3.5.1Part views and sections Clause 3.5.3Pitch lines Clause 3.5.6Priority Clause 3.7Projection Clause 3.5.2(b)Rectangular opening Clause 3.6.2Revolved section Clause 3.6.3Spacing Clause 3.3Special requirements Clause 3.5.8Symmetry Clause 3.6.3Types Clause 3.1, 3.5

Linear dimens ions Clause 8.2.4.2Linear dimens ions — Tolerancing Clause 8.3.8.1Local or part sections Clause 7.4.4

Material or parts list Clause 2.5.11Materials Clause 2.3Maximum material condition symbol Clause 8.3.3.7Maximum material principle Clause 8.3.6, Appendix E

Symbol Clause 8.3.3.7Maximum material size Clause 8.3.2.16Monodetail drawing Clause 2.2.10Multidetail drawing Clause 2.2.11, 2.5.8.3

Non-preferred sizes Clause 2.4.2Not-to-scale dimensions Clause 8.2.5.3Notes

General Clause 8.2.7(a)Local Clause 8.2.7(b)Supplement to symbols Clause 4.3.4.8Tolerance Clause 8.3.8.3

Notes on drawings Clause 8.2.7Numerals See CharactersNuts — Conventional representation Clause 9.3.3, Table 9.3

Oblique projection Clause 6.6, Appendix DOrder of priority of coincident lines Clause 3.7Orientation of drawings Clause 2.5.14Orthogo nal projection Clause 6.3

Part Clause 2.2.19Part number Clause 2.2.20Partial views Clause 6.3.6Parts list Clause 2.5.11Perspec tive projection Clause 6.7Pictorial drawings Clause 6.8Pipelines See AS1100.201

Plane faces — Represen tation Clause 3.6.1Planes — Sections Clause 7.2Planes — Spatial geometry

Auxiliary Clause 6.4.5Cutting Clause 6.4.6Inclined Figure 6.19Principal Clause 6.4.3Notation Clause 6.4.4Trace Clause 6.4.5, Figure 6.19,

Figure 6.20Planes of projection Clause 6.4.5Preferred sizes Clause 2.4.1Principal planes Clause 6.4.3Principle of indep ende ncy Clause 8.3.4Print trimming line Clause 2.5.2Profile — Dimensioning Clause 8.2.6.11Profile and curved surfaces —

Tolerancing Clause 8.3.15Projected tolerance zone symbol Clause 8.3.3.8Projection

Axonometric Clause 6.5, 6.5.1,Appendix C

Cabinet Clause 6.6.2Cavalier Clause 6.6.2Dimetric Clause 6.5.2, 6.5.3,

6.5.4.2General oblique Clause 6.6.2Ident ification Clause 6.1Indication Clause 2.5.6Isometric Clause 6.5.2, 6.5.3,

6.5.4.1Oblique Clause 6.6, 6.6.1

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 239: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

237 AS 1100.101—1992

Orthogona l Clause 6.3, 6.3.1Auxiliary views Clause 6.3.7Deviation from method Clause 6.3.5First ang le Clause 6.3.2, 6.3.3Partial views Clause 6.3.6Removed views Clause 6.3.8Repetitive features Clause 6.3.11Rounded and filleted

intersections Clause 6.3.9Selection of views Clause 6.3.4Symmetrical parts Clause 6.3.10Third ang le Clause 6.3.2, 6.3.3

Perspective Clause 6.7, 6.7.1Trimetric Clause 6.5.2, 6.5.3,

6.5.4.3Types Clause 6.2

Projection lines Clause 3.5.2(b), 8.2.3.1

RadiiDimensioning Clause 8.2.6.2Tolerancing Clause 8.3.15

Rectangular opening Clause 3.6.2Removed sections Clause 7.4.8Removed views Clause 6.3.8Repeated features and parts —

Conventional representation Clause 9.3.1Repetitive features Clause 6.3.11Revolved sections Clause 3.6.3, 7.4.6Riveted assemblies — Conventional

representation Clause 9.3.5Roll drawings Clause 2.4.3, 2.5.1.3Rounded and filleted intersections Clause 6.3.9

Scales Section 5Indication Clause 5.3Recommended ratios Clause 5.4

Screw threadsConventional represen tation Clause 9.3.2Orientation and location Clause 8.8Pictorial drawings Clause 6.8.4

Screws — Conven tionalrepresentation Clause 9.3.3, Table 9.3

Sectioning Section 7Sections

Conventions Clause 7.4.9Views Clause 7.4

Sheet designation Clause 2.5.5Size Clause 8.3.2.10

Actual Clause 8.3.2.11Least material Clause 8.3.2.12Limits of Clause 8.3.2.13Local Clause 8.3.2.14Mating Clause 8.3.2.15Maximum material Clause 8.3.2.16Nominal Clause 8.3.2.17

Size of drawing sheets Clause 2.4Slashes Clause 4.3.4.5Slots Clause 8.10.12Spacing of characters, words and

lines Clause 4.1.4Spatial geometry Clause 6.4Spheres — Dimensioning Clause 8.2.6.1(e)Squares — Dimensioning Clause 8.2.6.3Surveying and mapping scales Clause 5.4.2, Table 5.2Symbol Clause 4.3.2.1Symbols Clause 4.3

Comparisons Appendix ADepth Clause 8.2.6.4(b),

Tab le 8.1, Figure 4.14Diameter Clause 8.2.6.1(a),

Tab le 8.1, Figure 4.14Dimensioning Tab le 8.1, Figure 4.14Hole Clause 8.2.6.4(a),

Tab le 8.1, Figure 4.14Notes Clause 4.3.4.8Radius Clause 8.2.6.2(a),

Tab le 8.1, Figure 4.14Slope Clause 8.2.6.12,

Figure 4.14Taper Clause 8.2.6.12,

Figure 4.14Tolerancing Clause 8.3.3, Figure 4.14Tolerancing, geometry Clause 8.4.3, Table 8.2,

Figure 4.14

Square Clause 8.2.6.3,Tab le 8.1, Figure 4.14Clause 8.3.3.10, 8.3.5

Clause 8.3.3.7, 8.3.6, 8.4.5.8

Clause 8.3.3.8

Clause 8.3.3.3Symmetrical objects Clause 3.6.3Symmetrical parts Clause 6.3.10System Clause 2.2.21

Tabular method Clause 8.4.5Tabular presen tation of dimensions Clause 8.2.5.2Tabulated drawing Clause 2.2.12Tapers

Dimensioning Clause 8.2.6.10, 8.2.6.12Tolerancing Clause 8.3.13

Terminator Clause 4.3.2.2Thickness of character lines Clause 4.1.3Third ang le projection Clause 6.3.2, 6.3.3

Symbol Clause 2.5.6(a)Threade d assemblies—

Conventional represen tation Clause 9.3.4Threade d fasteners —

Conventional represen tation Clause 9.3.3Threads — Dimensioning Clause 8.2.6.9Three toleranced dimens ions method Clause 8.3.13.5Title block Clause 2.5.9,

Figures 2.6-2.9Tolerance Clause 8.1.1.2

Bilateral Clause 8.3.2.19Diagram Clause 8.4.2.8Form Clause 8.4.2.9Frame method Clause 8.4.4.3Geometry Clause 8.4.2.10Indication methods Clause 8.3.7Orientation Clause 8.11Position Clause 8.4.2.11Profile Clause 8.11Runou t Clause 8.11Unilateral Clause 8.3.2.20Zone Clause 8.3.2.2

Toleranced taper (or angle) method Clause 8.3.13.3Tolerances of drawing sheets Clause 2.4.4,Tolerances of pos ition Clause 8.10Tolerancing

(see also Geometry tolerancing) Clause 8.3Angle between two lines Appendix FAngular dimens ions Clause 8.3.8.2,

Appendix FAngular surfaces Clause 8.3.12Coord inate Clause G3Direct methods Clause 8.3.8Envelope principle Clause 8.3.10Features Clause 8.3.11Geometry See Geometry

tolerancingLimits of dimensions Clause 8.3.9Linear dimens ions Clause 8.3.8.1, 8.3.9.3Notes Clause 8.3.8.3Position Clause G4Profile and curved surfaces Clause 8.3.15Radii Clause 8.3.14Symbols Figure 4.14,

Clause 8.3.3Tapers Clause 8.3.13

Traces of planes Clause 6.4.5Trimetric projection Clause 6.5.2, 6.5.3.2,

6.5.4.3Types of lines Clause 3.1

Views Clause 6.1.1Designation Figure 6.1Selection Clause 6.3.4

Virtual cond ition Clause 8.4.2.6, 8.7Virtual size Clause 8.4.2.7Vulgar fractions Clause 4.1.7

Webs, ribs, spokes in sections Clause 7.4.9.2Works as executed drawing Clause 2.2.14

COPYRIGHT

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)

Page 240: AS 1100.101-1992 Technical drawing - General principles · 2020. 10. 27. · AS 1100.101—1992 Australian Standard Technical drawing Part 101: General principles For history before

This page has been left intentionally blank.

Acc

esse

d by

RM

IT U

NIV

ER

SIT

Y L

IBR

AR

Y o

n 29

Jul

201

3 (D

ocum

ent c

urre

ncy

not g

uara

ntee

d w

hen

prin

ted)